Garmin | G500H | Garmin G500H G500H Pilot's Guide

Garmin G500H G500H Pilot's Guide
G500H
Pilot's Guide
© 2015 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 7.00, or later. Some differences in operation
may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to later software versions.
Garmin International, Inc., 1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, KS 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913/397.8200
Fax: 913/397.8282
Garmin AT, Inc., 2345 Turner Road SE, Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503/391.3411
Fax 503/364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd., Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road, Hounsdown Business Park, Southampton,
SO40 9RB, U.K.
Tel. +44 (0) 870 850 1243 Fax +44 (0) 238 052 4004
Garmin Corporation, No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road, Xizhi Dist., New Taipei City 221, Taiwan (R.O.C.)
Tel: 886/02.2642.9199
Fax: 886/02.2642.9099
Garmin Singapore Pte. Ltd., 46 East Coast Road, #05-06 Eastgate, Singapore 428766
Tel : (65) 63480378
Fax : ( 65 ) 63480278
At Garmin, we value your opinion. For comments about this guide, please e-mail:
Techpubs.Salem@Garmin.com
www.garmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted,
disseminated, downloaded or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written
permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual and of
any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for personal
use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text
of this copyright notice and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual
or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin®, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. Garmin
SVT™ is a trademark of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the
express permission of Garmin.
NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; SkyWatch® is a registered trademark of L-3 Avionics
Systems; Sirius and XM are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.; Iridium® is a registered trademark of
Iridium Communications Inc.; United States radar data provided by NOAA; Canadian radar data provided
by Environment Canada; European radar data collected and provided by Meteo France.
This part shall comply with Garmin Banned and Restricted Substances document, 001-00211-00.
October 2015
Printed in the U.S.A.
AVIATION LIMITED WARRANTY
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
i
Sec 8
Glossary
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 7
Symbols
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
To obtain warranty service, contact your local Garmin Authorized Service Center. For assistance in
locating a Service Center near you, visit the Garmin web site at http://www.garmin.com or contact
Garmin Customer Service at 866-739-5687.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
International Purchases: A separate warranty may be provided by international distributors for
devices purchased outside the United States depending on the country. If applicable, this warranty is
provided by the local in-country distributor and this distributor provides local service for your device.
Distributor warranties are only valid in the area of intended distribution. Devices purchased in the
United States or Canada must be returned to the Garmin service center in the United Kingdom, the
United States, Canada, or Taiwan for service.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Online Auction Purchases: Products purchased through online auctions are not eligible for
warranty coverage. Online auction confirmations are not accepted for warranty verification. To obtain
warranty service, an original or copy of the sales receipt from the original retailer is required. Garmin
will not replace missing components from any package purchased through an online auction.
Sec 3
MFD
Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace (with a new or newly-overhauled replacement
product) the product or software or offer a full refund of the purchase price at its sole discretion.
SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY.
Sec 2
PFD
IN NO EVENT SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, WHETHER RESULTING FROM THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT OR
FROM DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
Sec 1
System
THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING
UNDER ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, WHICH MAY
VARY FROM STATE TO STATE.
Foreword
All Garmin avionics products are warranted to be free from defects in materials or workmanship for:
two years from the date of purchase for new Remote-Mount and Panel-Mount products; one year
from the date of purchase for new portable products and any purchased newly-overhauled products;
six months for newly-overhauled products exchanged through a Garmin Authorized Service Center;
and 90 days for factory repaired or newly-overhauled products exchanged at Garmin in lieu of repair.
Within the applicable period, Garmin will, at its sole option, repair or replace any components that
fail in normal use. Such repairs or replacement will be made at no charge to the customer for parts
or labor, provided that the customer shall be responsible for any transportation cost. This warranty
does not apply to: (i) cosmetic damage, such as scratches, nicks and dents; (ii) consumable parts,
such as batteries, unless product damage has occurred due to a defect in materials or workmanship;
(iii) damage caused by accident, abuse, misuse, water, flood, fire, or other acts of nature or external
causes; (iv) damage caused by service performed by anyone who is not an authorized service
provider of Garmin; or (v) damage to a product that has been modified or altered without the written
permission of Garmin. In addition, Garmin reserves the right to refuse warranty claims against
products or services that are obtained and/or used in contravention of the laws of any country.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
WARNING: Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated
upon the use of the terrain function. The G500H Terrain Proximity feature
is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance
and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of
surroundings during flight. The Terrain Proximity feature is only to be used
as an aid for terrain avoidance and is not certified for use in applications
requiring a certified terrain awareness system. Terrain data is obtained
from third party sources. Garmin is not able to independently verify the
accuracy of the terrain data.
Sec 3
MFD
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitudes (MSAs) are only advisory
in nature and should not be relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and
terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current aeronautical charts
for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
WARNING: The Garmin G500H has a very high degree of functional
integrity. However, the pilot must recognize that providing monitoring and/
or self-test capability for all conceivable system failures is not practical.
Although unlikely, it may be possible for erroneous operation to occur
without a fault indication shown by the G500H. It is thus the responsibility
of the pilot to detect such an occurrence by means of cross-checking with
all redundant or correlated information available in the cockpit.
Sec 7
Symbols
WARNING: The altitude calculated by GPS receivers is geometric height
above Mean Sea Level and could vary significantly from the altitude
displayed by pressure altimeters, such as the output from the GDC 74H Air
Data Computer, or other altimeters in aircraft. GPS altitude should never
be used for vertical navigation. Always use pressure altitude displayed by
the G500H PFD or other pressure altimeters in aircraft.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
WARNING: Do not use outdated database information. Databases used
in the G500H system must be updated regularly in order to ensure that
the information remains current. Pilots using an outdated database do so
entirely at their own risk.
Appendix B
Index
WARNING: Do not use basemap (land and water data) information for
primary navigation. Basemap data is intended only to supplement other
approved navigation data sources and should be considered as an aid to
enhance situational awareness.
ii
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
WARNING: Do not use Terrain-HSVT information for primary terrain
avoidance. Terrain-HSVT is intended only to enhance situational awareness.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
WARNING: Exceeding 200 deg/second in pitch or roll may invalidate
AHRS attitude provided to the G500H.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
WARNING: To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and
understand all aspects of the G500H Pilot’s Guide. Thoroughly practice
basic operation prior to actual use. During flight operations, carefully
compare indications from the G500H to all available navigation sources,
including the information from other NAVAIDs, visual sightings, charts, etc.
For safety purposes, always resolve any discrepancies before continuing
navigation.
Sec 3
MFD
WARNING: For safety reasons, G500H operational procedures must be
learned on the ground.
Sec 2
PFD
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to
determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link
weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by
the data link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated
weather product age.
Sec 1
System
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in,
near, or around areas of hazardous weather. Information contained within
data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather
conditions.
Foreword
WARNING: Traffic information shown on the G500H Multi Function Display
is provided as an aid in visually acquiring traffic. Pilots must maneuver
the aircraft based only upon ATC guidance or positive visual acquisition
of conflicting traffic.
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
iii
Sec 1
System
Foreword
WARNING: Because of anomalies in the earth’s magnetic field, operating
the G500H within the following areas could result in loss of reliable attitude
and heading indications. North of 70° North latitude and south of 70° South
latitude. An area north of 65° North latitude and between longitude 75°
West and 120° West. An area north of 70° North latitude and between
longitude 70° West and 128° West. An area north of 70° North latitude and
between longitude 85° East and 114° West. An area south of 55° South
latitude between longitude 120° East and 165° East.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
CAUTION: FIS-B information is to be used for pilot planning
decisions and pilot near-term decisions focused on avoiding areas
of inclement weather that are beyond visual range or where poor
visibility precludes visual acquisition of inclement weather. FIS-B
weather and NAS status information may be used as follows:
- To promote pilot awareness of own ship location with respect to reported
weather, including hazardous meteorological conditions, NAS status indicators,
and enhance pilot planning decisions and pilot near-term decision-making.
- To cue the pilot to communicate with the Air Traffic Control
controller, Flight Service Station specialist, operator dispatch, or
airline operations control center for general and mission critical
meteorological information, NAS status conditions, or both.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
FIS-B information, including, weather information, NOTAMs, and TFR
areas, are intended for the sole purpose of assisting in long- and nearterm planning decision making. The system lacks sufficient resolution and
updating capability necessary for aerial maneuvering associated with
immediate decisions.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
CAUTION: The United States government operates the Global Positioning
System and is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The
GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and
performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the Garmin G500H utilize
GPS as a precision electronic NAVigation AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as
with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the G500H can be misused or
misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
Appendix B
Index
CAUTION: When interfaced with a GSR56 Iridium transceiver only one
SD card may be present in the GDU620 and it must be in the lower slot.
CAUTION: The Garmin G500H does not contain any user-serviceable parts.
Repairs should only be made by an authorized Garmin service center.
Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and
the pilot’s authority to operate this device under FAA/FCC regulations.
iv
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Appendix B
Index
v
Appendix A
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 8
Glossary
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 7
Symbols
NOTE: Do not use SafeTaxi or Chartview functions as the basis for ground
maneuvering. SafeTaxi and Chartview functions have not been qualified to
be used as an airport moving map display (AMMD). SafeTaxi and Chartview
are intended to improve pilot situational awareness during ground
operations should only be used by the flight crew to orient themselves on
the airport surface.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
NOTE: Terrain-HSVT is standard when the Garmin Synthetic Vision
Technology™ (SVT) option is installed.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive
harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with California’s Proposition
65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please
refer to our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Sec 3
MFD
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including
screen images of the G500H bezel and displays, are subject to change and
may not reflect the most current GDU 620 system. Depictions of equipment
may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
Sec 2
PFD
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars
can cause an intermittent loss of attitude and heading displays while the
aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 feet away
from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
Sec 1
System
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight
Restriction (TFR) information. Always confirm TFR information through
official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
Foreword
CAUTION: The G500H PFD and MFD displays use a lens coated with a
special anti-reflective coating that is very sensitive to skin oils, waxes, and
abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM THE
ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important to clean the lens using a
clean, lint-free cloth and an eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified as safe
for anti-reflective coatings.
Foreword
Record of Revisions
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Part Number Revision Date
190-01150-02
A
1/27/10
B
4/1/10
C
11/19/10
D
8/01/11
E
12/30/11
G
H
J
AOPA Airport Directory
AOPA MEMBERSHIP PUBLICATIONS, INC. AND ITS RELATED ORGANIZATIONS
(HEREINAFTER COLLECTIVELY "AOPA") EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, WITH
RESPECT TO THE AOPA INFORMATION INCLUDED IN THIS DATA, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE INFORMATION IS PROVIDED “AS
IS” AND AOPA DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING
ITS ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OR OTHERWISE. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES
INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL AOPA BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES THAT RESULT FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
SOFTWARE OR RELATED DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF AOPA OR AN AOPA AUTHORIZED
REPRESENTATIVE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. USER
AGREES NOT TO SUE AOPA AND, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, TO
RELEASE AND HOLD HARMLESS AOPA FROM ANY CAUSES OF ACTION, CLAIMS OR
LOSSES RELATED TO ANY ACTUAL OR ALLEGED INACCURACIES IN THE INFORMATION.
SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OR LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
F
Description
Production release
Update Airspeed Tape markings.
Updates for SW Versions 4.00 and 5.00
Added updates for SW Version 6.00
Removed inaccurate obstacle description
on page A-4.
1/19/12 Removed extraneous information in Sec.
5, Additional Features.
2/3/15 Updates for SW Version 7.00.
3/27/15 Chart section updated.
10/27/15 Updates for SW Version 7.01.
vi
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
1
System Overview..................................................................................1-1
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
vii
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 5
Additional
Features
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2.1 PFD Soft Keys......................................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Airspeed Indicator.................................................................................. 2-6
2.2.1
Markings................................................................................ 2-7
Sec 3
MFD
Primary Flight Display (PFD).................................................................2-1
Sec 2
PFD
2
Sec 1
System
1.1 System Description................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.1
Standard System Line Replaceable Units (LRU)........................ 1-2
1.1.1.1 GDU 620............................................................................... 1-3
1.1.1.2 Air Data Computer (ADC)....................................................... 1-3
1.1.1.3 Attitude Heading Reference Syste (AHRS)................................ 1-4
1.1.1.4 GMU 44................................................................................. 1-7
1.1.1.5 GTP 59.................................................................................. 1-7
1.1.1.6 Garmin Navigator Interface..................................................... 1-7
1.1.1.7 GEA 71.................................................................................. 1-7
1.1.2
Optional Line Replaceable Units (LRU).................................... 1-8
1.1.2.1 GDL 88H (Optional)................................................................ 1-8
1.1.2.2 Weather Radar....................................................................... 1-8
1.1.2.3 Stormscope® (Optional).......................................................... 1-8
1.1.2.4 GSR 56 (Optional).................................................................. 1-8
1.1.2.5 GDL 69/69A (Optional)........................................................... 1-9
1.1.2.6 GAD 43/43e (Optional)........................................................... 1-9
1.1.2.7 GTX 330/330D (Optional)..................................................... 1-10
1.2 System Power Up................................................................................. 1-11
1.3 International Geomagnetic Reference Field........................................... 1-13
1.4 System Operation................................................................................. 1-14
1.4.1
Pilot Controls....................................................................... 1-14
1.4.1.1 PFD Knob............................................................................. 1-14
1.4.1.2 PFD Bezel Keys..................................................................... 1-15
1.4.1.3 MFD Knobs.......................................................................... 1-17
1.4.1.4 MFD Bezel Keys.................................................................... 1-17
1.4.2
Using the Soft Key Controls.................................................. 1-18
1.4.3
Using the Page Menus.......................................................... 1-19
1.4.4
System Settings.................................................................... 1-20
1.4.5
Display Backlighting............................................................. 1-23
Foreword
Contents
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix B
Index
2.2.2
Reference Speeds................................................................... 2-7
2.3 Attitude Indicator................................................................................... 2-8
2.3.1
Extreme Attitude.................................................................. 2-10
2.4 Altimeter............................................................................................. 2-12
2.4.1
Setting the Altitude Bug and Alerter...................................... 2-12
2.4.2
Altitude Alerting................................................................... 2-13
2.4.3
Changing Barometric Setting................................................ 2-13
2.4.4
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting.............. 2-14
2.5 Vertical Speed (V/S) Indicator............................................................... 2-17
2.6 Horizontal Situation Indicator............................................................... 2-18
2.6.1
Setting the Heading Bug....................................................... 2-19
2.6.2
Turn Rate Indicator............................................................... 2-20
2.7 Course Deviation Indicator................................................................... 2-20
2.7.1
Changing CDI Sources.......................................................... 2-21
2.7.2
Changing CDI Course........................................................... 2-22
2.7.3
Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI).......................................... 2-23
2.7.4
Auto-Slewing....................................................................... 2-24
2.8 Supplemental Flight Data..................................................................... 2-26
2.8.1
Bearing Pointers................................................................... 2-26
2.8.2
Temperature Display............................................................. 2-28
2.8.3
Wind Vectors........................................................................ 2-28
2.8.4
DME Indication.................................................................... 2-29
2.8.5
Marker Beacon Annunciations.............................................. 2-29
2.8.6
Miscompare Annunciations................................................... 2-30
2.9 Attitude (ATT) Sync.............................................................................. 2-31
2.10 Radar Altimeter.................................................................................... 2-33
2.11 PFD Display Units................................................................................. 2-34
3
Multi-Function Display (MFD)...............................................................3-1
3.1 Navigation Map Pages........................................................................... 3-2
3.1.1
Default Navigation Map Page................................................. 3-3
3.1.2
Map Overlay Icons.................................................................. 3-3
3.1.3
Selecting Page Options........................................................... 3-4
3.1.4
Changing the Navigation Map Range..................................... 3-4
3.1.5
Decluttering Map Pages.......................................................... 3-4
3.1.6
Panning................................................................................. 3-6
3.1.7
Selecting Items on the Map.................................................... 3-7
3.1.8
Measuring Distances.............................................................. 3-8
viii
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
ix
Sec 2
PFD
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 1
System
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
3.1.9
Customizing Navigation Map Pages........................................ 3-9
3.1.10
Map Setup............................................................................. 3-9
3.1.10.1 Map Feature Options............................................................ 3-11
3.1.10.2 Weather Feature Options (Optional)...................................... 3-20
3.1.10.3 Traffic Feature Options (Optional).......................................... 3-23
3.1.10.4 Aviation Feature Options...................................................... 3-24
3.1.11
Split Screen (Optional).......................................................... 3-28
3.2 Aux Mode Pages.................................................................................. 3-29
3.2.1
System Settings.................................................................... 3-29
3.2.1.1 Display Brightness................................................................ 3-30
3.2.1.2 Airspeed Reference Marks.................................................... 3-31
3.2.1.3 PFD Options - Wind Vector.................................................... 3-32
3.2.1.4 PFD Options - Nav Status..................................................... 3-33
3.2.1.5 Temperature Reference......................................................... 3-33
3.2.1.6 Synchronization (Dual Installations Only)............................... 3-34
3.2.1.7 Date and Time...................................................................... 3-36
3.2.1.8 MFD Display Units................................................................ 3-37
3.2.1.9 System Display Units............................................................ 3-38
3.2.2
Sirius XM Satellite Radio XM Information (Optional).............. 3-39
3.2.3
Sirius XM Satellite Radio XM Entertainment Radio (Optional).3-40
3.2.4
System Status....................................................................... 3-41
3.2.4.1 Database Sync Operation...................................................... 3-42
3.2.4.2 Resolving Database Conflicts................................................ 3-46
3.2.5
ADS-B/FIS-B Status (optional)............................................... 3-48
3.2.6
External Video (optional)....................................................... 3-49
3.2.6.1 Select Video Source.............................................................. 3-49
3.2.6.2 Zoom................................................................................... 3-50
3.2.6.3 Panning............................................................................... 3-50
3.2.6.4 Setup................................................................................... 3-50
3.2.6.5 Restore Defaults................................................................... 3-52
3.2.6.6 Full Screen........................................................................... 3-53
3.2.7
Position Reporting (optional)................................................ 3-54
3.2.7.1 Status.................................................................................. 3-54
3.2.7.2 Report Type.......................................................................... 3-54
3.2.8
Iridium Phone Operation (Optional)....................................... 3-57
3.2.8.1 Status.................................................................................. 3-57
3.2.8.2 Managing the Phone Book................................................... 3-59
3.2.8.3 Phone Volume...................................................................... 3-62
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
3.2.8.4 Making a Phone Call............................................................ 3-63
3.2.8.5 Answering a Phone Call....................................................... 3-64
3.3 Flight Plan Pages................................................................................. 3-65
3.3.1
Active Flight Plan Page......................................................... 3-65
3.3.1.1 Active Flight Plan Detail........................................................ 3-66
3.3.1.2 Active Flight Plan Options..................................................... 3-66
3.3.1.3 Setting the Altitude Minimums Alerter................................... 3-67
3.3.2
Waypoint Information Page.................................................. 3-68
3.3.2.1 Selecting a Waypoint............................................................ 3-69
3.3.2.2 Waypoint/Runway/Frequency Information Detail.................... 3-71
3.3.2.3 Airport Directory................................................................... 3-74
3.3.2.4 Waypoint Weather Information (Optional)............................. 3-75
3.3.3
Charts Page (Optional)......................................................... 3-76
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
4
Hazard Avoidance.................................................................................4-1
4.1 Terrain Configurations............................................................................ 4-1
4.2 Terrain Scale.......................................................................................... 4-3
4.3 Terrain Proximity.................................................................................... 4-3
4.3.1
Displaying Terrain Proximity.................................................... 4-5
4.3.1.1 Terrain Proximity Page Display on the Terrain Page.................. 4-5
4.3.1.2 Terrain Proximity Page Display on a Navigation Map Page....... 4-6
4.3.1.3 Terrain Proximity Page 120° Arc or 360° Rings........................ 4-6
4.3.1.4 Terrain Proximity Page Aviation Data....................................... 4-8
4.3.2
Terrain Proximity Limitations................................................... 4-9
4.3.3
System Status......................................................................... 4-9
4.4 External H-TAWS.................................................................................. 4-10
4.5 Garmin Terrain-HSVT™ (Optional)........................................................ 4-11
4.5.1
Garmin Terrain-HSVT™ Page 120° Arc or 360° Rings........... 4-12
4.5.2
Garmin Terrain-HSVT™ Page Aviation Data.......................... 4-13
4.5.3
Inhibiting/Enabling Garmin Terrain-HSVT™ Alerting.............. 4-14
4.5.4
Garmin Terrain-HSVT™ Reduced Protection (RP) Mode......... 4-15
4.5.5
Synthetic Vision Alerts and Annunciations.............................. 4-17
4.5.6
Mute Caution Alerts............................................................. 4-19
4.5.7
SVT Alerts When Is Terrain Inhibited...................................... 4-20
4.6 Traffic Systems..................................................................................... 4-21
4.6.1
TAS/TCAS 1 Traffic (Optional)................................................ 4-21
4.6.1.1 Displaying and Operating Traffic (TAS Systems)...................... 4-22
4.6.1.2 Switching from Standby Mode to Operating Modes............... 4-22
x
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
xi
Sec 2
PFD
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 1
System
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
4.6.1.3 Range Ring.......................................................................... 4-23
4.6.1.4 Altitude Display.................................................................... 4-23
4.6.1.5 TAS/TCAS Symbology........................................................... 4-24
4.6.1.6 Traffic System Status............................................................. 4-25
4.6.1.7 Traffic Pop-Up...................................................................... 4-27
4.6.2
TIS Traffic (Optional)............................................................. 4-28
4.6.2.1 Traffic Map Page.................................................................. 4-28
4.6.2.2 TIS Symbology...................................................................... 4-30
4.6.2.3 TIS Limitations...................................................................... 4-31
4.6.2.4 TIS Alerts.............................................................................. 4-33
4.6.2.5 Traffic Pop-Up...................................................................... 4-34
4.6.2.6 TIS System Status................................................................. 4-35
4.6.3
ADS-B Traffic (Optional)........................................................ 4-37
4.6.3.1 Target Selection.................................................................... 4-38
4.6.3.2 Status.................................................................................. 4-39
4.6.3.3 Motion Vector...................................................................... 4-40
4.7 XM WX Satellite Weather (Optional)..................................................... 4-42
4.7.1
Using XM WX Satellite Weather Products.............................. 4-42
4.7.2
Customizing the XM WX Satellite Weather Map.......................4-43
4.7.3
XM Weather Symbols and Product Age................................. 4-45
XM WX Weather Symbols and Product Age............................................ 4-45
4.7.4
XM Weather Legends........................................................... 4-47
4.7.5
XM NEXRAD........................................................................ 4-49
4.7.5.1 Reflectivity........................................................................... 4-51
4.7.5.2 NEXRAD Limitations............................................................. 4-51
4.7.6
XM Weather Page Map Orientation....................................... 4-52
4.7.7
NEXRAD Data Viewing Range............................................... 4-52
4.7.8
NEXRAD Legend.................................................................. 4-53
4.7.9
NEXRAD Source................................................................... 4-54
4.7.10
XM Echo Tops...................................................................... 4-55
4.7.11
XM Cloud Tops..................................................................... 4-57
4.7.12
XM WX Satellite Lightning.................................................... 4-59
4.7.13
XM SIGMETs and AIRMETs................................................... 4-60
4.7.14
XM PIREPs........................................................................... 4-62
4.7.15
XM METARs......................................................................... 4-63
4.7.16
XM Winds Aloft.................................................................... 4-65
4.7.17
XM Surface Analysis and City Forecast.................................. 4-67
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix B
Index
4.7.18
XM County Warnings............................................................ 4-69
4.7.19
XM TFRs............................................................................... 4-70
4.7.20
XM Cell Movement............................................................... 4-72
4.7.21
XM AIREPs........................................................................... 4-74
4.7.22
XM Cyclone.......................................................................... 4-76
4.7.23
XM Freezing Level................................................................ 4-77
4.7.24
XM Icing.............................................................................. 4-78
4.7.25
XM Turbulence..................................................................... 4-79
4.8 GFDS Weather (Optional)..................................................................... 4-80
4.8.1
Register With GFDS.............................................................. 4-82
4.8.1.1 Register With GFDS.............................................................. 4-82
4.8.1.2 Deactivate Unit Registration With GFDS................................ 4-83
4.8.2
Using GFDS Satellite Weather Products................................. 4-84
4.8.3
Customizing the GFDS Weather Map.................................... 4-84
4.8.4
Weather Page Map Orientation............................................. 4-86
4.8.5
GFDS Data Request.............................................................. 4-87
4.8.5.1 GFDS Data Request Coverage............................................... 4-88
4.8.5.2 GFDS Data Request Auto Request......................................... 4-90
4.8.5.3 GFDS Data Request Manual Request.................................... 4-91
4.8.5.4 GFDS Data Request Status Window...................................... 4-91
4.8.6
Precipitation (PRECIP) Data Viewing Range........................... 4-92
4.8.7
PRECIP Legend..................................................................... 4-93
4.8.8
GFDS Infrared Satellite (IR SAT) Data Viewing Range............. 4-94
4.8.9
Data Link Lightning (DL LTNG) Data Viewing Range.............. 4-95
4.8.10
SIGMETs and AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)........................................... 4-96
4.8.11
AIREP/PIREP......................................................................... 4-98
4.8.12
METARs............................................................................. 4-100
4.8.13
Winds Aloft........................................................................ 4-103
4.8.14
GFDS TFRs.......................................................................... 4-105
4.9 FIS-B Weather (Optional).................................................................... 4-107
4.9.1
NEXRAD Abnormalities....................................................... 4-107
4.9.2
NEXRAD Limitations........................................................... 4-107
4.9.3
NEXRAD Intensity............................................................... 4-108
4.9.4
NEXRAD............................................................................ 4-108
4.9.5
NEXRAD Weather Setup..................................................... 4-109
4.9.5.1 Weather Page Map Orientation........................................... 4-109
4.9.5.2 NEXRAD Data Viewing Range............................................. 4-109
4.9.5.3 NEXRAD Legend................................................................ 4-110
xii
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
xiii
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 3
MFD
5.2 SafeTaxi® ........................................................................................... 5-18
5.2.1
Using SafeTaxi® .................................................................. 5-19
5.2.1.1 Decluttering......................................................................... 5-19
5.2.1.2 Hot Spot Information............................................................ 5-19
5.2.2
SafeTaxi® Cycle Number and Revision................................... 5-21
5.3 Sirius XM Satellite Radio Entertainment................................................ 5-22
5.3.1
Activating Sirius XM Satellite Radio Services.......................... 5-22
5.3.2
Sirius XM Satellite Radio Information.................................... 5-24
5.3.3
Sirius XM Satellite Radio Entertainment Radio....................... 5-25
5.3.3.1 Channel Categories.............................................................. 5-26
5.3.3.2 Selecting a Sirius XM Satellite Radio Channel........................ 5-27
5.3.3.3 Sirius XM Satellite Radio Volume........................................... 5-28
5.3.3.4 Sirius XM Satellite Radio Channel Presets............................. 5-29
Sec 2
PFD
Additional Features (Optional).............................................................5-1
5.1 Viewing FliteCharts and ChartView........................................................ 5-2
5.1.1
ChartView (Optional).............................................................. 5-3
5.1.2
FliteCharts® ........................................................................... 5-4
5.1.3
Determining Chart Database Type, Coverage, and Currency..... 5-5
5.1.4
Selecting a Chart.................................................................... 5-7
5.1.4.1 Selecting FliteCharts or ChartView.......................................... 5-7
5.1.4.2 Selecting a New Chart by FPL, NRST, or RECENT........................5-8
5.1.4.3 Selecting a Chart Manually..................................................... 5-8
5.1.4.4 Chart Auto-Selection.............................................................. 5-9
5.1.5
Using Charts........................................................................ 5-11
5.1.5.1 Chart Zooming and Panning................................................. 5-12
5.1.5.2 Viewing Chart Details in ChartView...................................... 5-13
5.1.5.3 Setting the Altitude Minimums Alerter................................... 5-15
5.1.5.4 Viewing Chart NOTAMs........................................................ 5-16
5.1.5.5 Day/Night View.................................................................... 5-17
Sec 1
System
5
NEXRAD Source................................................................. 4-111
SIGMETs and AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)......................................... 4-113
AIREP/PIREP....................................................................... 4-116
METARs............................................................................. 4-118
Winds Aloft........................................................................ 4-120
FIS-B TFRs.......................................................................... 4-121
FIS-B Product Times............................................................ 4-122
Stormscope........................................................................ 4-123
Foreword
4.9.5.4
4.9.5.5
4.9.5.6
4.9.5.7
4.9.5.8
4.9.5.9
4.9.6
4.10
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix B
Index
5.3.4
GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver Troubleshooting................... 5-30
5.4 Garmin Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT™) (Optional)......................... 5-31
5.4.1
Garmin SVT™ Operation...................................................... 5-33
5.4.2
Activating and Deactivating Garmin SVT™........................... 5-34
5.6.3
Garmin SVT™ Features........................................................ 5-35
5.4.3.1 Flight Path Marker (FPM)...................................................... 5-35
5.4.3.2 Zero-Pitch Line..................................................................... 5-35
5.4.3.3 Horizon Heading.................................................................. 5-36
5.4.3.4 Airport Signs........................................................................ 5-36
5.4.3.5 Runway Depiction................................................................ 5-37
5.4.3.6 Traffic................................................................................... 5-38
5.4.3.7 Obstacles............................................................................. 5-39
5.4.3.8 Field of View........................................................................ 5-40
5.4.3.9 Unusual Attitudes................................................................. 5-42
6
Annunciations and Alerts......................................................................6-1
6.1 Alerts.................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 System Status...................................................................................... 6-14
7
Symbols.................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Map Page Symbols................................................................................. 7-1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
SafeTaxi™ Symbols.............................................................................. 7-2
Traffic Symbols....................................................................................... 7-2
Terrain Obstacle Symbols........................................................................ 7-4
Basemap Symbols.................................................................................. 7-5
Map Tool Bar Symbols............................................................................ 7-6
Miscellaneous Symbols........................................................................... 7-7
8 Glossary................................................................................................8-1
Appendix A.................................................................................................. A-1
SD Card Use and Databases...........................................................................A-1
Jeppesen Databases................................................................................A-3
Updating the Jeppesen Aviation Database...............................................A-3
Garmin Databases...................................................................................A-5
Updating Garmin databases....................................................................A-7
Index............................................................................................................ B-1
xiv
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1
System Description
Foreword
1
Sec 3
MFD
Garmin Navigator(s)
GMU 44 Magnetometer
Sec 2
PFD
In normal operating mode, the Primary Flight Display (PFD) presents
graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed, altitude, vertical
speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster. The Multi-Function
Display (MFD) normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation
information, as well as supplemental data.
Sec 1
System
This section provides an overview of the G500H Avionics Display System.
The G500H system is an integrated display system that presents primary flight
instrumentation, navigation, and a moving map to the pilot through large-format
displays.
GTP 59 Temperature Probe
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
GDU 620
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
AHRS
Sec 7
Symbols
Air Data Computer
Optional Interfaces
Autopilot
Flight Director
Weather
Datalink
Traffic
Radar
Altimeter
Navigation
Radio
ADF
Weather
Radar
DME
External
Video
GAD 43/43e
Sec 8
Glossary
Audio Panel
The system consists of the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• Air Data Computer (ADC)
• Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS)
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
1-1
Appendix B
Index
• GDU 620 Primary Flight Display (PFD) and Multi Function Display
(MFD)
Appendix A
Figure 1-1 G500H System (LRU Configuration)
Foreword
• GNS 480, CNX80, GNS 400W series, GNS 500W series, GTN 600
series, GTN 700 series, or a compatible GPS Navigator
• Temperature Probe (such as the GTP 59)
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
• GMU 44 Magnetometer
• GEA 71 Engine/Airframe Unit
Interfaces to various other aircraft systems and equipment are supported,
including:
• GAD 43/43e Adapter
• GDL 88H ADS-B Transceiver
• GSR 56 Satellite Data Link Receiver
• NavCom - Garmin GTR/GNC or SL30 COM/NAV radios, or selected 3rdparty radios
• ADF
• Audio Panel
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• Autopilot/Flight Director
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
• GDL 69/69A Satellite Data Link Receiver
• Garmin GTS or GTX traffic awareness systems, or selected 3rd party
devices
• Garmin GWX radar systems or selected 3rd party radars
• Radar Altimeter
• Video Sources
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
• Stormscope®
1.1.1
Standard System Line Replaceable Units (LRU)
This guide covers the operation of the GDU 620 display as integrated in
the G500H system. The G500H Avionics Display System is an avionics suite
designed to replace the traditional flight instrument cluster. The system combines
primary flight instrumentation, navigational information, and a moving map all
displayed on dual color screens. The G500H system is composed of sub-units or
Line Replaceable Units (LRUs). LRUs have a modular design, which greatly eases
troubleshooting and maintenance of the G500H system. A failure or problem
can be isolated to a particular LRU, which can be replaced quickly and easily.
1-2
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
1.1.1.1
GDU 620
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
The GDU 620 has dual VGA (640 x 480 pixels) 6.5 inch LCD displays. The
right side of the GDU is a PFD and the left side is the MFD. In some models or
installations, the PFD and MFD and their controls are switched to the other side.
The MFD shows a moving map, flight plan, weather, and other supplemental
data. The PFD shows primary flight information, in place of traditional pitotstatic and gyroscopic systems and also provides an HSI for navigation.
Foreword
Each LRU has a particular function, or set of functions, that contributes to the
system’s operation.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
1.1.1.2
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 1-2 GDU 620 PFD and MFD
Air Data Computer (ADC)
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
The Air Data Computer (ADC) compiles information from the pitot/static
system and an Outside Air Temperature (OAT) sensor. The ADC provides
pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed, and OAT information to the G500H
system. The ADC communicates with the GDU 620 and AHRS using an ARINC
429 digital interface.
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
Figure 1-3 Air Data Computer
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
1-3
Attitude Heading Reference System (AHRS)
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering while AHRS is not operating in normal
mode may degrade AHRS accuracy.
The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) unit provides aircraft
attitude information to the G500H display. The unit contains advanced
accelerometers and rate sensors and interfaces with both the ADC and the
GMU 44 magnetometer. The AHRS utilizes GPS data forwarded from the GDU
620. Attitude and heading information is sent to the GDU 620 using an ARINC
429 digital interface.
Figure 1-4 AHRS
The International Geomagnetic Reference Field (IGRF) model is contained in
the AHRS and is updated once every five years. The IGRF model is part of the
Navigation Database. At system power-up, the IGRF models in the AHRS and
the Navigation Database are compared. If the IGRF model in the AHRS is out of
date, the user is prompted to update. The prompt will appear after the G500H
splash screen is acknowledged on the MFD.
Attitude and heading information is displayed on the PFD when the AHRS
receives appropriate combinations of information from the external sensor
inputs.
AHRS Inputs
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
1.1.1.3
GPS
Magnetometer
Available
Available
Available
Available
Unavailable
Unavailable
Unavailable
Available
1-4
Air Data
AHRS
Mode
Available/ Normal
Unavailable
Available No Mag
Unavailable No Air/
No Mag
Available No GPS
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
AHRS Outputs
Attitude
Heading
Available
Available
Available
Available
GPS Track
GPS Track
Available
Available
190-01150-02 Rev. J
AHRS Inputs
Unavailable
Unavailable
Unavailable
Unavailable
Available
Unavailable
Air Data
Attitude
Heading
Available No Mag Available
GPS Track
Unavailable
Fail
Unavailable Unavailable
Unavailable
Fail
Unavailable Unavailable
Sec 1
System
Magnetometer
AHRS Outputs
Foreword
GPS
AHRS
Mode
Table 1-1 AHRS Operation
Heading
Invalid
AHRS No-GPS
Mode
Attitude/Heading
Invalid
Sec 2
PFD
AHRS Normal
Operation
Sec 3
MFD
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
1-5
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Appendix A
Map orientations change from HDG UP to TRACK UP and Map orientations
will change back to HDG up when heading is restored.
Sec 8
Glossary
NOTE: In this case the magnetic standby compass and GPS ground track
can be used to keep the aircraft on the desired heading.
Sec 7
Symbols
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS continues to output valid attitude
information and GPS Track information is used. However, the PFD heading
display is flagged as invalid with a red “X” and “TRK” is annunciated to the
right of the Track value in magenta. The Track value color changes from white
to magenta.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
A maximum of two GPS inputs are provided to the AHRS. If GPS information
from one of the inputs fails, the AHRS uses the remaining GPS input and an
alert message is issued to inform the pilot. If both GPS inputs fail, the AHRS
will continue to provide attitude and heading information to the PFD as long as
magnetometer and airspeed data are available and valid.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Loss of GPS, magnetometer, or air data inputs is communicated to the pilot by
message advisory alerts. Refer to Section 6 for specific AHRS alert information.
Any failure of the internal AHRS inertial sensors results in loss of attitude and
heading information. This is indicated by red “X” flags over the corresponding
flight instruments.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 1-5 AHRS Operation
Foreword
Sec 1
System
When heading fails the heading bug is not removed and the GDU continues
driving the autopilot heading error output using track in place of heading.
Track Mode Active
Sec 2
PFD
Heading Failed
Figure 1-6 Track Mode shown as Active when Heading Info has failed
Failure of the air data input has no effect on the AHRS output while AHRS is
receiving valid GPS information. Invalid or unavailable airspeed data, in addition
to complete GPS failure, results in loss of all attitude and heading information.
NOTE: Fastest AHRS alignment is achieved with the aircraft stationary and
with all AHRS inputs valid (3-D GPS position, magnetometer, and air data).
During initial power up on the ground, no GPS position and/or magnetic
anomalies are common. If the aircraft is taxied prior to AHRS alignment,
alignment may be delayed until after a valid 3-D GPS position is available.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
SVT Is Turned Off
When Heading
Fails
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
NOTE: During in-flight alignment of the AHRS, minimize aircraft
maneuvering. The AHRS will align with shallow banking and pitch angles
(less than 20 degrees of roll or 5 degrees of pitch). AHRS alignment may
not be possible during more aggressive maneuvers.
1-6
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
1.1.1.4
GMU 44
Foreword
Sec 1
System
The GMU 44 magnetometer senses the earth’s magnetic field. Data is sent
to the GRS 77H AHRS for processing to determine aircraft magnetic heading.
This unit receives power directly from the GRS 77H and communicates with the
GRS 77H using a RS-485 digital interface.
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 1-7 GMU 44 Magnetometer
GTP 59
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
The GTP 59 temperature probe provides Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
data to the GDC 74H.
Sec 3
MFD
1.1.1.5
Sec 5
Additional
Features
1.1.1.7
Sec 7
Symbols
1.1.1.6
Garmin Navigator Interface
The G500H system requires connection to at least one external Garmin
WAAS GPS navigator, such as the 400W/500W series, GTN 600/700 series, or
GNS 480.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 1-8 GTP 59 Temperature Probe
GEA 71
Sec 8
Glossary
The GEA 71 receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe
sensors.
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
Figure 1-9 GEA 71
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
1-7
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
1.1.2
A variety of LRUs are available to expand and enhance the G500/600 system.
1.1.2.1
GDL 88H (Optional)
The GDL 88H is a remotely mounted ADS-B transceiver. There are four
models of the GDL 88H. Models with a single bottom mounted UAT antenna
meet TSO C154c Class A1S and are available with or without an internal GPS/
SBAS receiver. Models with one top mounted and one bottom mounted antenna
meet TSO C154c Class A1H and are also available with or without an internal
GPS/SBAS receiver.
1.1.2.2
Weather Radar
The Garmin GWX system, or selected 3rd party radar, provides airborne
weather and ground mapped radar data to the MFD.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Optional Line Replaceable Units (LRU)
Figure 1-10 GWX 68 Weather Radar
1.1.2.3
Stormscope® (Optional)
NOTE: Refer to the WX-500 Pilot’s Guide for a detailed description of the
WX-500 StormScope.
The WX-500 StormScope Weather Mapping Sensor is a passive weather
avoidance system that detects electrical discharges associated with thunderstorms
within a 200 NM radius of the aircraft. The StormScope measures relative
bearing and distance of thunderstorm-related electrical activity and reports the
information to the display. Interfaces are currently only available for the WX500 StormScope System.
1.1.2.4
GSR 56 (Optional)
The GSR 56 is an Iridium® satellite transceiver that supports voice telephone
calls, aircraft position reporting, and world wide weather products.
1-8
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
1.1.2.5
GDL 69/69A (Optional)
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
The GDL 69/69A is a Sirius XM Satellite Radio Data Link Receiver that
receives broadcast weather data. The GDL 69A is the same as the GDL 69
with the addition of an Sirius XM Satellite Radio audio entertainment receiver.
Weather data and control of audio channel and volume is displayed on the MFD,
via a High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection. The GDL 69A is also
interfaced to an audio panel for distribution of the audio signal. A subscription
to the Sirius XM Satellite Radio service is required to enable the GDL 69/69A
capability. Subscription information is available at: http://www.garmin.com/xm/.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
1.1.2.6
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 1-11 GDL 69/69A XM Satellite Radio Data Link Receiver
GAD 43/43e (Optional)
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
The GAD 43e performs the same functions as the GAD 43, but adds support
for additional interfaces to various aircraft systems. The GAD 43e supports
interfaces to various autopilots (for altitude preselect and vertical speed control),
analog NAV radios, DME, analog radar altimeters, marker beacons, and ADF
receivers.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The GAD 43 is an adapter that converts AHRS digital pitch, roll, heading
and yaw rate data into analog signals used by autopilot systems. The GAD 43
is installed remotely between the AHRS and an existing autopilot. The analog
signals from the GAD 43 mimic those of spinning-mass gyros that provide data
to the autopilot and allow the gyro to be replaced by the AHRS and GAD 43
combination.
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
1-9
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
1.1.2.7
GTX 330/330D (Optional)
Figure 1-13 GTX 330/330D Mode S Transponder
The GTX 330/330D is a solid-state transponder that provides Modes A, C,
and S functions. The transponder provides traffic information to the display
through an ARINC 429 digital interface.
NOTE: GTX 33/33D can also be used to display traffic information on the
GDU 620.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 1-12 GAD 43/43e AHRS Adapter
1-10
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
1.2
System Power Up
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
NOTE: During in-flight alignment of the AHRS, minimize aircraft
maneuvering. The AHRS will align with shallow banking and pitch angles
(less than 20 degrees of roll or 5 degrees of pitch). AHRS alignment may
not be possible during more aggressive maneuvers.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
NOTE: Fastest AHRS alignment is achieved with the aircraft stationary
and with all AHRS inputs valid (3-D GPS position, magnetometer, and
air data). During initial power up on the ground, no GPS position and/or
magnetic anomalies are common. If the aircraft is taxied prior to AHRS
alignment, alignment may be delayed until after a valid 3-D GPS position
is available.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
On the PFD, the AHRS begins to initialize and “AHRS ALIGN: Keep Wings
Level” is displayed. The AHRS should display valid attitude and heading fields
typically within the first minute and a half after power-up. The AHRS can align
itself during level flight.
Sec 3
MFD
During system initialization, test annunciations are displayed. All system
annunciations should disappear typically within the first 30 seconds after powerup. Upon power-up, bezel key backlights also become momentarily illuminated
on the GDU 620 display bezel.
Sec 2
PFD
The G500H System is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and
receives power directly from electrical busses. The GDU 620 and supporting
sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test features that
exercise the processor, memory, external inputs, and outputs to ensure safe
operation.
Sec 1
System
NOTE: Refer to Section 6 for system-specific annunciations and alerts.
Foreword
NOTE: See the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for specific procedures
concerning avionics power application and emergency power supply
operation.
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
1-11
Foreword
Sec 1
System
When the MFD powers up, the splash screen displays the following
information:
• Software version and part number
• Basemap database version
• Terrain database version
• Obstacle database expiration date
Sec 2
PFD
• Aviation database expiration date
• Airport Directory database expiration date
Databases are displayed in white if they are determined to be current.
Databases are displayed in yellow if they have expired, are not yet effective, or if
the current date/time is not yet available from the GPS.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
• Chart database status
Figure 1-12 System Startup Pages
When the interfaced GPS unit has acquired a sufficient number of satellites
to determine a position, the aircraft’s current position is shown on the
Navigation Map Page. Pressing the ENT key (or soft key indicated by the arrow)
acknowledges this information and displays the Navigation Map Page.
1-12
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
1.3
International Geomagnetic Reference Field
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
GRS MV DB UPDATE AVAILABLE. UPDATE FROM yyyy TO yyyy
(e.g. 2005 to 2010)
Foreword
The IGRF (International Geomagnetic Reference Field) model is contained
in the GRS 77 and is only updated once every five years. The IGRF model is
part of the Navigation Database. At system power-up, the IGRF models in the
GRS 77 and in the Navigation Database are compared, and if the IGRF model
in the GRS 77 is out of date, the user is prompted to update the IGRF model in
the GRS 77. The following prompt will appear after the G500H splash screen is
acknowledged on the MFD.
Sec 3
MFD
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
1) When the Update message appears, to start the update process press the ENT
key with “OK” highlighted. To update at another time, turn the Large knob to
highlight “Cancel” and then press ENT.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
1-13
Appendix B
Index
2) After the update is complete, press the ENT key to continue normal operation.
Appendix A
Figure 1-13 GRS MV DB Update
System Operation
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
1.4
NOTE: Refer to Section 6 for detailed descriptions of all alerts and
annunciations.
1.4.1
1.4.1.1
PFD Knob
Pressing the PFD knob performs the default action for the selected mode.
Refer to the PFD Bezel Keys section for details.
Heading
Mode
Course
Mode
Altitude
Mode
Vertical Speed
Mode
Barometer
Mode
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Pilot Controls
The GDU 620 controls have been designed to simplify operation of the system
and minimize workload and the time required to access functionality. Controls
are located on the PFD and MFD bezels and are comprised of a PFD knob, MFD
dual concentric knobs, bezel keys, and soft keys.
NOTE: After 10 seconds of inactivity in another mode, the PFD knob
selected mode will revert to Heading mode.
1. Press the desired PFD mode selection key (HDG, CRS, ALT, V/S, or BARO).
A window will be displayed near the upper left corner of the HSI showing the
current value for that mode.
2. Turn the PFD knob to select the desired value.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 1-14 Selection Modes Adjusted with the PFD Knob
1-14
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
1.4.1.2
PFD Bezel Keys
Sec 1
System
Selects Heading Select mode. This is the default mode for the PFD knob.
Pressing the PFD knob in Heading mode will center the Heading Bug on the
current Heading. Set the heading bug on the HSI by turning the PFD knob
after pressing the HDG key.
Foreword
Heading (HDG)
Course (CRS)
Altitude Select Window
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Selects Altitude Select mode. Pressing the PFD knob in Altitude Select mode
will enter the current altitude in the Altitude Select window. Set the Altitude
Bug by turning the PFD knob after pressing the ALT key.
Sec 3
MFD
Altimeter (ALT)
Sec 2
PFD
Selects Course Select mode. Pressing the PFD knob in Course mode will
center the CDI for a VOR or GPS OBS course.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Altitude Bug
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Current Altitude
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Barometric Setting
Appendix A
Figure 1-15 Pressing PFD Knob Sets Altitude Select to Current Altitude
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
1-15
Selects Vertical Speed (V/S) mode. Pressing the PFD knob in V/S mode will
synchronize the bug to the current vertical speed.
Vertical Speed Bug
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Vertical Speed (V/S)
Vertical Speed Bug Setting
Figure 1-16 Pressing V/S Knob Sets Vertical Speed Bug to Current Vertical Speed
For helicopters with vertical speed operating limitations, red bands showing
Vertical Speed Maximum and Minimum ranges will be shown on the left side of
the Vertical Speed tape. When the Vertical Speed Indicator is in one of the red
ranges, the background color of the Vertical Speed Indicator will turn red.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Current Vertical Speed
Sec 7
Symbols
Vertical Speed Maximum
Vertical Speed Bug
Current Vertical Speed
Sec 8
Glossary
Vertical Speed Indicator
Appendix A
Vertical Speed Minimum
Appendix B
Index
Vertical Speed Bug Setting
Figure 1-17 Vertical Speed Warning Indication
1-16
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Barometer (BARO)
MFD Knobs
The MFD knobs are for navigating and selecting information on the MFD
pages. More details are provided in the MFD section.
Sec 2
PFD
Small (Inner) MFD Knob
MFD Bezel Keys
Menu
Enter (ENT)
Appendix A
Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
Clear (CLR)
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
1-17
Appendix B
Index
Erases information, cancels entries, or removes page menus. Pressing and
holding the CLR key displays the Navigation Map 1 page.
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 8
Glossary
Displays a context-sensitive list of options. This list allows the user to access
additional features or make setting changes that relate to particular pages.
Sec 7
Symbols
Pressing the Range arrow keys changes the range on the Map pages. The Up
arrow zooms out. The Down arrow zooms in. The keys also aid in scrolling
up and down text pages.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Range (RNG)
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Selects the MFD page group. When the cursor is ON, the large MFD knob
moves the cursor to highlight available fields.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Large (Outer) MFD Knob
Sec 3
MFD
Selects a specific page within a page group. Pressing the small MFD knob
turns the selection cursor ON and OFF. When the cursor is ON, data may be
entered in the applicable window by turning the small and large MFD knobs.
In this case, the large MFD knob moves the cursor on the page and the small
MFD knob selects individual characters or values for the highlighted cursor
location.
1.4.1.4
Sec 1
System
1.4.1.3
Foreword
Selects Barometric Setting Select mode. Pressing the PFD knob in Baro mode
toggles between standard pressure (29.92 in/1013 mb) and the previously
selected value.
The soft keys are located along the bottoms of the displays. The soft key
labels shown depend on the soft key level or page being displayed. The bezel
keys below the soft keys can be used to select the appropriate soft key.
MFD functions indicated by the soft key labels vary depending on the page
selected and are located at the bottom of the MFD display. Press the soft key
located directly below the soft key label. To select the function indicated on the
soft key label, press the soft key directly below the label.
Selected Soft Key Unselected Soft Keys
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Foreword
Using the Soft Key Controls
Sec 1
System
1.4.2
Soft Key Labels
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Soft Keys
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 1-18 MFD Soft Key Layout
1-18
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
1.4.3
Using the Page Menus
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
3) Press the ENT key to select the desired option.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
4) Press the CLR key or MFD knob to remove the menu and cancel the
operation.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2) Turn the small or large MFD knob to scroll through a list of available options (a
scroll bar always appears to the right of the window/box when the option list
is longer than the window/box).
No Options
Sec 1
System
Navigating within a Menu
1) Press the MENU key to display the menu.
Foreword
The GDU 620 has a dedicated MENU key that when pressed displays a
context-sensitive list of options for functions in the MFD. This options list allows
the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically
relate to the currently displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing
menu. Some menus provide access to additional submenus that are used to view,
edit, select, and review options. Menus display “No Options” when there are no
options for the window/page selected. Soft key presses do not display menus or
submenus.
Options for MAP Window
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 1-19 Page Menu Examples
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
1-19
Foreword
1.4.4
System Settings
G500H system settings are managed from the Aux Mode System Setup
Page. The following settings can be changed:
• Airspeed References (Glide and Vy)
• PFD Options (Wind Vector and Nav Status)
• Date/Time (Date, Time, Time Format, and Time Offset)
• MFD Display Units (Distance/Speed and Altitude/Vertical Speed)
• System Display Units (Navigation Angle Reference, Pressure Units, and
Temperature Units)
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
• Display Brightness (Mode and Level)
Figure 1-20 System Setup Page
1-20
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
System Settings Values
Foreword
1) From the first AUX page, press the small MFD knob and turn the large MFD
knob to highlight the desired value.
2) Turn the small MFD knob to select “ON” or “OFF.”
Sec 1
System
3) Press ENTER to save the setting.
Settings
Level
Mode
Airspeeds
Nav Status
option not
available in all
installations.
Date
Time
Time Format
Time Offset
SAT, TAT, ISA
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Temperature
Reference
Off, Style 1 - Style 4 PFD wind vector display
format.
Style 1 - 2
Location of GPS navigation
data.
Sec 7
Symbols
Date/Time
Crossfill Nav information to
GDU 620
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
(NAV Status)
Reference markers on PFD
airspeed tape
Sec 5
Additional
Features
PFD Options
(Wind Vector)
Exceptions
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Glide (or REF)
VR
VX (or V1)
VY (or V2)
Synchronization CDI - On/Off
BARO - On/Off
Affected Quantities
Brightness levels on the PFD
and MFD
Sec 3
MFD
Category
Display
Brightness
Sec 2
PFD
More detail on changing settings is in the Section 3 - MFD Aux pages System
Settings section.
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
1-21
Foreword
Settings
Affected Quantities
Imperial (SM, MPH) Bearing distances
Metric (KM, KPH)
(information windows)
Nautical (NM, KT) Distance (information
window)
Flight plan distances
Map ranges
DIS field (Navigation Status
Box)
All distances on MFD
All speeds on MFD
Exceptions
Airspeed
Indicator
True Airspeed
Wind speed
vector
Map range
(Traffic Page,
Terrain
Proximity
Page)
Altitude and
Vertical Speed
Feet
Meters
All elevations on MFD
Altimeter
Vertical Speed
Indicator
Navigation
Angle
Magnetic (North)
True (North)
Heading
Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Barometric
Setting
Inches (in)
Hectopascals (hpa)
Barometric pressure on PFD
Temperature
Celsius
Fahrenheit
Data Link (WX/ XM
TFR Source)
FIS
GFDS
All temperatures on PFD
Select weather source.
Table 1-2 Display Units Settings (System Setup Page)
More detail on changing settings is in the Section 3 - MFD Aux pages System
Settings section.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Category
Distance and
Speed
1-22
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
1.4.5
Display Backlighting
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Auto or Manual
Sec 3
MFD
Manual Adjustment 0.1% to 100%
or Auto
Sec 2
PFD
2) Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired brightness Level and then press
ENTER.
Sec 1
System
Backlighting Adjustment
1) From the first AUX page, press the small MFD knob to highlight the “DISPLAY
BRIGHTNESS” “MODE” box.
Foreword
The backlighting of the PFD and MFD displays and bezel keys can be
adjusted automatically or manually. The default setting (automatic backlighting
adjustment) uses the photocell located at the top right corner of the bezel to
automatically adjust for ambient lighting conditions. Photocell calibration
curves are configured by the installer to optimize display appearance through
a broad range of cockpit lighting conditions. Manual backlighting adjustment
can be accomplished using the existing instrument panel dimmer bus or the
following procedures.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 1-21 Display Brightness Adjustment
4) Press ENT.
Sec 7
Symbols
3) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the MODE field. Turn the small MFD
knob to select “AUTO” or “MANUAL.”
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
1-23
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
This page intentionally left blank
1-24
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD)
Sec 1
System
Horizon Trim Ball Roll Scale Roll
Line Indicator
Zero Pointer
Nav Status Bar
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Soft Keys
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Soft Key Labels
Figure 2-1 PFD Description (Ground Pointer Mode)
Distance from Your
Present Position to
Current FPL Leg Wpt
Desired Track
Sec 7
Symbols
Current Nav
Source
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
PFD Knob
SD Card Slots
Current FPL
Leg Wpt
Sec 3
MFD
PFD Knob
Mode Indicator
Wind Vectors
Air
Temperature
Horizontal
Situation
Indicator
Sec 2
PFD
Altitude Tape
Vertical
Speed Tape
Current
Barometric
Pressure Setting
Heading Bug Select
Course Select
Altitude Bug Select
Vertical Speed Bug Select
Barometric Setting Select
Air Speed Tape
Current Track
Sec 8
Glossary
Nav Status Style 1 - Top of Display
Nav Status Style 2 - Left of HSI
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-1
Appendix B
Index
NOTE: When navigating to a waypoint very far away, the DTK, CRS, and
TRK values displayed on the GDU 620 may differ from those displayed
on the navigator, however the CDI is correct and is the primary means
of navigation. This is because the GDU 620 applies magnetic variation
corrections for the current aircraft location, but some navigators apply
magnetic variation correction for the waypoint location.
Appendix A
Figure 2-2 PFD Nav Status Bar Description
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
Functions on the PFD are accessed by using the bezel keys on the side of the
PFD and the soft keys below the PFD.
PFD Soft Keys
AP TEST
CDI
PFD
1-2
GPS
Source 1
VOR/ILS
Source 2
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.1
SYN VIS
SYN TERR
HRZN HDG
APTSIGNS
DME
Sec 3
MFD
DME NAV 1
DME NAV 2
DME HOLD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
BRG
Sec 5
Additional
Features
NAV 1
GPS 1
ADF
BRG 2
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
NAV 2
GPS 2
ADF
CLK/TMR
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
HIDE
CLOCK/TIMER
START/STOP
RESET
BACK
Figure 2-3 PFD Soft Key Diagram
The soft keys are located along the bottom of the displays below the soft key
labels. The soft key labels shown depend on the soft key level or page being
displayed. The soft keys can be used to select the appropriate soft key function.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
BRG 1
2-2
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Selected Soft Key
Unselected Soft Key
Foreword
Soft Key Labels
Soft Keys
Sec 1
System
Unselected Soft Key
Soft Key Not Available
For Selection
Sec 2
PFD
Soft Key Labels
Figure 2-4 PFD Soft Key Layout
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-3
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Appendix A
PFD
Pressing the PFD soft key displays the SYN VIS, DME, BRG, and BACK soft
keys. The DME and SYN VIS soft keys will only be present if the system is
configured for these features.
Sec 8
Glossary
1-2
The 1-2 soft key toggles between the available receivers for selected navigation
source (i.e. GPS1 and GPS2 or VOR/LOC1 and VOR/LOC2). This soft key
will only be present if the system is configured for a second GPS or VOR/
LOC.
Sec 7
Symbols
CDI
The CDI soft key toggles between the selection of GPS or VOR/LOC as the
active navigation source. The GDU CDI soft key will change the source in
the connected navigator and making a source change in the navigator will be
reflected in the GDU 620.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The AP TEST soft key is available if the GAD 43 is used to provide attitude
information to an autopilot. The AP TEST soft key disengages the autopilot
as part of the GAD 43 test.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
AP Test
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: If a soft key is pressed and held for longer than 1 second, it is
ignored.
Sec 3
MFD
When a soft key is selected, its color changes to black text on gray background
and remains this way until it is turned off, at which time it reverts to white text
on black background. When a soft key function is disabled, the soft key label is
subdued (dimmed).
BRG1
Foreword
The BRG1 soft key cycles through the available bearing 1 indicator modes
(NAV1, GPS1, ADF, or None).
Sec 1
System
The BRG2 soft key cycles through the available bearing 2 indicator modes
(NAV2, GPS2, ADF, or None). This soft key will only be present if the system
is configured for a second GPS or VOR/LOC.
Sec 2
PFD
BRG2
DME
Sec 3
MFD
The DME NAV soft keys select the DME submenu. For some installations, the
DME NAV soft keys simply toggle the DME display on/off as the submenu
options will not exist. The availability of the DME controls vary based on the
installation.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
The DME NAV soft keys select NAV 1 or 2 as the DME tuning source. If this
soft key is pressed again when already selected, the DME display is removed
from the PFD. Not all installations will have both NAV1 and NAV2 soft keys.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
DME Information
DME Hold Annunciation
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Selected DME
Set Hold for Selected DME
Figure 2-5 DME Soft Keys
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
DME HOLD
DME HOLD activates/deactivates the DME tuning hold function. DME
HOLD may be selected for either DME NAV 1 or DME NAV 2. The Hold
function is automatically canceled when switching between NAV1 and
NAV2 tuning sources. Not all installations will have the DME HOLD soft
key.
Appendix A
SYN VIS
The SYN VIS soft key is available if Synthetic Vision Technology™ is installed.
It enables Synthetic Vision and displays the associated soft keys.
Appendix B
Index
SYN TERR
The SYN TERR soft key is available if Synthetic Vision Technology™ is
installed and enables synthetic terrain depiction.
2-4
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
HRZN HDG
Foreword
The HRZN HDG soft key is available if Synthetic Vision Technology™ is
installed. Pressing this key enables horizon heading marks and digits.
APTSIGNS
The APTSIGNS soft key is available if Synthetic Vision Technology™ is
installed and enables airport sign posts for airports. Only heliports in the
current flight plan are shown.
Sec 1
System
CLK/TMR
Sec 2
PFD
The Clock/Timer function displays a clock or timer window in the lower left
corner of the PFD.
Sec 3
MFD
Hide Clock
Select
Timer
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Select
Start
Reset
Clock
Timer
Timer
Figure 2-6 Clock and Timer Functions
Hide Timer
Sec 5
Additional
Features
BACK
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The BACK soft key returns to the previous soft key menu.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-5
Airspeed Indicator
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a rolling number gauge using a
moving tape. The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving tape are
marked at intervals of 10 units, while minor tick marks on the moving tape are
indicated at intervals of five units. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, regardless
of the displayed units.
NOTE: Airspeed units (KTS, MPH, KPH) are configured to match the approved
units for the installation.
The Airspeed Indicator provides Indicated Airspeed, True Airspeed, and
Ground Speed. The Airspeed Trend Indicator shows what the airspeed will be
in six seconds, if the current acceleration is maintained. The actual airspeed is
displayed inside the black pointer.
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical, pink/magenta line, extending up or
down on the airspeed scale, shown to the right of the color-coded speed range
strip. The end of the trend vector corresponds to the predicted airspeed in six
seconds if the current acceleration is maintained. If the trend vector crosses into
the overspeed range, the text of the digital airspeed readout changes to yellow.
The trend vector is absent if the speed remains constant or if any data needed to
calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.2
Ground Speed
Overspeed Range (Red)
Sec 7
Symbols
Maximum (Vne) Speed With Engine On
Sec 8
Glossary
Airspeed Trend Indicator (pink/magenta line)
Current Airspeed
Appendix A
OR
Maximum (Vne Power Off) Speed With Engine Off or
Maximum Autorotation Speed
One of the two marking types is selected during the
installation configuration.
Appendix B
Index
Normal Operating Range (Green)
True Airspeed
Airspeed Units
Figure 2-7 Airspeed Tape
2-6
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
2.2.1
Markings
Reference Speeds
Sec 3
MFD
V-speeds (Glide and VY) default values are set during the installation process,
but can be changed and turned on/off from the System Setup page on the first
page of the Aux page group. When active (on), the V-speeds are displayed at
their respective locations to the right of the airspeed scale.
Sec 2
PFD
2.2.2
Sec 1
System
NOTE: The actual colors and patterns of the airspeed tape may vary by
installation. See your AFM/POH for more details.
Foreword
A color-coded speed range strip is located on the moving tape. The colors are
configured to match the approved markings for the installation. See the AFM/
POH.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Glide Reference Marker
Vy Reference Marker
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 2-8 Reference Speeds
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-7
Attitude Indicator
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground
with a white horizon line. The Attitude Indicator displays pitch, roll, and slip/
skid information.
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.3
9
1
Sec 2
PFD
7
Sec 3
MFD
2
3
8
6
4
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
10
5
1
Roll Pointer
2
Roll Scale
3
Aircraft Symbol
4
Horizon Line
5
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Trim Ball Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
10
Pitch Reference Bars
Figure 2-9 Attitude Indicator
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line,
major pitch marks and numeric labels are shown for every 10º, up to 80º. Minor
pitch marks are shown for intervening 5º increments, up to 25º below and 45º
above the horizon line. Between 20º below to 20º above the horizon line, minor
pitch marks occur every 2.5º.
Angle of bank is indicated by the position of the pointer on the roll scale.
Major tick marks are 30º and 60º and minor tick marks are 10º, 20º, and 45º
are shown to the left and right of the zero.
The Trim Ball Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. The indicator moves
with the roll pointer and moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate lateral
acceleration. Trim is indicated by the location of the bar relative to the pointer.
One bar displacement (as shown below) is equal to one ball displacement on a
traditional Trim Ball Indicator.
2-8
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Roll Pointer
Trim Ball Indicator
Foreword
Roll Scale Zero
Sec 1
System
Figure 2-10 Trim Indication
Roll Scale Zero Pointer
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Roll Pointer
Sec 3
MFD
In an aircraft with an Attitude Indicator that has a Ground Pointer, the pointer
above the Roll Scale shifts with the roll or bank angle of the aircraft to keep the
Roll Scale Zero Pointer pointing towards the ground.
Sec 2
PFD
Ground/Sky Pointer mode is configured during installation and can not be
changed by the pilot.
Roll Scale
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 2-11 Attitude Indicator with a Ground Pointer configuration in a left turn
Sec 7
Symbols
In an aircraft with an Attitude Indicator that has a Sky Pointer, the pointer
below the roll scale shifts with the roll or bank angle of the aircraft to keep the
Roll Pointer pointing towards the sky.
Roll Scale Zero Pointer
Roll Scale
Sec 8
Glossary
Roll Pointer
Appendix A
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Appendix B
Index
Figure 2-12 Attitude Indicator with a Sky Pointer configuration in a left turn
2-9
Extreme Attitude
Extreme attitude is defined as a roll greater than 65º left or right, 30º pitch up,
or 20º pitch down. Red chevrons are displayed at greater than 50º pitch up and
30º pitch down. The PFD will “declutter” when the aircraft enters an extreme
attitude. Only the primary functions will be displayed in these situations.
The following information is removed from the PFD (and corresponding soft
keys are disabled) when the aircraft is in an unusual attitude:
• PFD Knob Mode Annunciations
• Ground Speed, True Airspeed, and Airspeed Units
• Selected Altitude, Barometer Settings, and Selected Vertical Speed
• Vertical Course Deviation Indicator
• Traffic and Terrain Annunciations
• Flight Director Command Bars
• Radar Altimeter digital readout
• Marker beacon annunciation
• Fast/Slow indicator
• DME field
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.3.1
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 2-13 Extreme Pitch Indication
Figure 2-14 Extreme Pitch Indication
Figure 2-15 Extreme Pitch Indication
Nose Down
Nose Up
2-10
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
2-11
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 2-16 Extreme Roll Indication with Display Declutter
Altimeter
The altimeter displays the current altitude, altitude trend, altitude bug setting,
altitude bug, and the current BARO setting.
The Altitude Trend Vector is a vertical, magenta line, extending up or down
on the left side of the Altitude scale. The end of the trend vector corresponds to
the predicted altitude in six seconds if the current vertical speed is maintained.
The Altitude Bug is displayed at the selected Altitude Bug setting. A portion
of the Altitude Bug will be displayed at the top or the bottom of the altitude tape
if the selected Altitude Bug is off of the tape.
When an optional Radar Altimeter is installed, the altitude received from the
radar altitude will be displayed on the PFD. See the Radar Altimeter section for
more details.
2.4.1
Setting the Altitude Bug and Alerter
1) Press the ALT key to activate Altitude mode.
2) Turn the PFD knob to move the Altitude Bug to a desired altitude.
OR
3) Press the center of the PFD knob to set the selected altitude to the current
altitude.
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.4
Current
Altitude
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Altitude
Trend
Indicator
Selected
Altitude
in the
Altitude
Alerter
window
Barometric
Setting
Figure 2-17 Altimeter
2-12
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
2.4.2
Altitude Alerting
Sec 2
PFD
The following occur when approaching the Selected Altitude:
Deviation of ±200 ft
2.4.3
Changing Barometric Setting
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-13
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Appendix A
The Barometric Setting affects the altitude values shown on the PFD.
Barometric pressure units may be displayed as either inches (in) or hectopascals
(hpa). See System Display Units in Section 3 for more detail.
1) Press the BARO key to activate Baro mode.
2) Turn the PFD knob to increase or decrease the altimeter setting. OR
Sec 8
Glossary
NOTE: The aural tone when approaching the selected altitude may be
configured at installation for either 200 feet or 1000 feet. The tone when
deviating from the selected altitude always occurs at 200 feet.
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 2-18 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Within 200 ft
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation
band (beyond ±200 feet of the Selected Altitude), the Selected Altitude
changes to yellow text on a black background, flashes for five seconds, and
an aural tone is generated.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• When the aircraft passes within 200 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected
Altitude changes to light blue text on a black background and flashes for
five seconds and an aural tone may be generated, if configured.
Sec 3
MFD
• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected
Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) changes to black text on a light blue
background, and flashes for five seconds. An audio alert may be generated,
if configured.
Within 1000 ft
Sec 1
System
NOTE: The Altitude Alerter function may be disabled in some installations.
When the Altitude Alerter is disabled, pressing the ALT key will result in
an “ALT KEY INOP” message.
Foreword
The Altitude Alerting function provides the pilot with visual and aural
alerts (if interfaced to an audio panel) when approaching the Selected Altitude.
Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset.
Baro Setting shown
in Altimeter window
Figure 2-19 Barometric Setting
3) Press the PFD knob while in Baro mode to toggle between Standard Pressure
(29.92 in) and the currently selected barometric setting.
2.4.4
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
NOTE: The Altitude Minimums Alerting Bug appears parked at the bottom
of the altitude tape as soon as a value is set in the minimums alerter. The
bug will unpark and start to move up the tape as soon as the altitude is
within the range of the tape. The bug is reset when power is cycled.
The following visual annunciations occur when approaching the MDA/DH:
• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the selected
altitude setting, the Minimums box appears with the altitude value in cyan
text.
• When the aircraft is within 100 feet of the selected altitude setting, the bug
and text turn white.
• Once the aircraft reaches the selected altitude minimums setting, the bug and
the altitude text turn yellow and the aural alert “Minimums, minimums,” is
heard one time. The text remains in yellow until the aircraft altitude is more
than 50 feet above the set altitude minimum value.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height
Alerting
For altitude awareness, a barometric Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or
Decision Height (DH) alert can be displayed on the PFD. The values are set in
the Active Flight Plan page or from the Charts page menu. When active, the
minimum descent altitude setting is displayed in the minimums window at the
bottom left of the Altitude Tape when you are within 2500 feet of the selected
minimum altitude.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
PFD Knob Selected
Baro Setting
2-14
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Cyan Within 2500 ft
White Within 100 ft
Yellow When
Altitude Reached
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Barometric
Minimums
Bug
Barometric
Minimums
Box
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 2-20 Barometric MDA/DH Alerting Visual Annunciations
NOTE: If you highlight the minimums Altitude field and hit the CLR key, it
will turn the minimums alerting functionality off.
Sec 7
Symbols
For details for setting the Altitude Minimums Bug on the Charts page, refer
to Section 5 - Additional Features - Charts Menu Selections.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
For details for setting the Altitude Minimums Bug on the Active Flight Plan
page, refer to Section 3 - MFD - Flight Plan Pages.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Setting the Altitude Minimums Bug is performed on either the FPL - Active
Flight Plan page or the FPL - Charts page.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
In dual installations, the minimums alerting altitude value may be set from
either GDU 620 and will be synchronized on both units.
Sec 3
MFD
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft
reaches 150 feet above the selected Minimum Altitude. Normally the altitude
alerter only allows selection of altitudes in 100 foot increments. When a value
other than 100 feet is set for Baro Mins, it becomes a selectable value in the
altitude alerter.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-15
Vertical Speed (V/S) Indicator
Vertical speed data is presented on the bottom right of the PFD. A Vertical
Speed bug and a bug setting are also available.
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.5
Vertical Speed Bug
Sec 2
PFD
Current Vertical Speed
Figure 2-21 Vertical Speed (V/S) Tape and Window
The Vertical Speed Indicator displays the aircraft vertical speed using a nonmoving tape. The tape can be scaled at ±2000, ±3000, or ±4000 fpm as set by
the installer. Major gradations are every 1000 fpm and minor gradations every
500 fpm. The current vertical speed is displayed in the pointer along the tape.
Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate is greater than 100
fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds the vertical speed displayed on the
tape, the pointer appears at the corresponding edge of the tape and the rate
appears inside the pointer.
Setting the Vertical Speed Indicator Bug
1) Press the V/S key to activate Vertical Speed mode.
2) Turn the PFD knob to change the Vertical Speed Bug.
3) Press the center of the PFD knob to set the Vertical Speed value to the current
vertical speed.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Vertical Speed Bug Setting
2-16
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
2.6
Horizontal Situation Indicator
Sec 3
MFD
15
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
1
Sec 2
PFD
14
Sec 1
System
13
Foreword
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in
a heading-up orientation. Letters indicate the cardinal points and numeric labels
occur every 30º. Major tick marks are at 10º intervals and minor tick marks at
5º intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI,
and the current ground track is represented on the HSI by a magenta diamond.
The HSI also presents turn rate, course deviation, bearing, and navigation
source information. The “MSG” annunciation will be shown in the HSI when
an unacknowledged message is present on the selected navigator. When the
message is acknowledged, the “MSG” annunciation will clear.
12
2
11
4
10
Sec 5
Additional
Features
3
5
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
9
6
7
8
9
Lateral Deviation Scale
2
Course Pointer
10
GPS Level of Service
3
Heading Bug
11
To/From Indicator
4
Navigation Source
12
Current Track Indicator
5
Aircraft Symbol
13
6
7
Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
Rotating Compass Card
15
Lubber Line
8
OBS Mode Active
16
MSG (Message) on Navigator
Appendix A
Turn Rate Indicator
Sec 8
Glossary
1
Sec 7
Symbols
16
Turn Rate/Heading
Trend Vector
14 Current Heading
Appendix B
Index
Figure 2-22 Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-17
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
2.6.1
Setting the Heading Bug
The Selected Heading is shown to the upper left of the HSI for 10 seconds
after being adjusted. The light blue bug on the compass rose corresponds to the
Selected Heading.
NOTE: The current heading will have a "T" to the right of the heading
value when the Nav Angle is set to True in the System Setup page of the
Aux page group.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
The 360º HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), with a Course
Pointer, To/From Indicator, and a sliding deviation bar and scale. The course
pointer is a single line arrow (GPS1, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double line arrow
(GPS2, VOR2, and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. “LOC”
will automatically be displayed if a localizer frequency is tuned. The To/From
arrow rotates with the course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID
is received.
Current Heading
(Magnetic North)
Heading Bug
New Heading Bug Setting
(Magnetic North)
Current Heading
(True north)
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
New Heading Bug Setting
(True North)
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 2-23 Heading Bug Setting
1) Press the HDG key to activate HDG mode.
OR
3) Press the PFD knob in HDG mode to set the Heading Bug to the current
heading.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
2) Turn the PFD knob to change the Heading Bug.
2-18
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
2.6.2
Turn Rate Indicator
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 2-24 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
2.7
Course Deviation Indicator
Sec 8
Glossary
GPS Level
of Service
Sec 7
Symbols
360º HSI
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course
pointer along a lateral deviation scale to display aircraft position relative to the
course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not displayed.
Navigation
Source
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Current Track Indicator
Sec 3
MFD
Lubber Line
½ Standard
Turn Rate
Sec 2
PFD
Heading Bug
Sec 1
System
Turn Rate indication.
Arrowhead shown for a
Turn Rate > 4 deg/sec
Standard Turn Rate
Foreword
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card.
Tick marks to the left and right of the lubber line denote half-standard and
standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the current turn
rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in six seconds,
based on the present turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator
by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn rate tick mark, corresponding
to a predicted heading of 18º from the current heading. At rates greater than four
deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the
prediction is no longer valid.
Scale
Appendix A
Crosstrack
Error
CDI
Appendix B
Index
Figure 2-25 Course Deviation Indicator
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-19
2.7.1
Changing CDI Sources
The CDI can display two sources of navigation: GPS or NAV (VOR, and LOC).
Color indicates the current navigation source: magenta (for GPS) or green (for
VOR and LOC). The full-scale limits for the CDI are defined by a GPS-derived
distance when coupled to GPS. When coupled to a VOR or localizer (LOC), the
CDI has the same angular limits as a mechanical CDI. If the CDI exceeds the
maximum deviation on the scale (two dots) while coupled to GPS, the crosstrack
error (XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol.
GPS
Navigator 1
VLOC
Navigator 1
GPS
Navigator 2
VLOC
Navigator 2
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
NOTE: The ILS Localizer and Glideslope deviation indicators will indicate
full-scale deflection for the GNS 480 navigator at the second dot. The GNS
400W/500W series navigators will indicate full-scale deflection at the edge
of the display.
Figure 2-26 CDI Navigation Sources
2-20
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
1) Press the CDI soft key to toggle between GPS and VOR/LOC source type.
Sec 1
System
3) Verify the navigation source by the indication on the HSI and in the upper left
corner of the PFD.
Foreword
2) Press 1-2 soft key to toggle between the 1 and 2 navigators of the GPS or VOR/
LOC sources.
NOTE: The selected navigator is the active navigator for all PFD and MFD
operations, except for the supplemental bearing pointers.
Sec 2
PFD
2.7.2
Changing CDI Course
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
New Course Setting
Sec 3
MFD
The Selected Course is shown to the upper left of the HSI for 10 seconds after
being adjusted.
Figure 2-27 Course Setting
Sec 5
Additional
Features
1) Press the CRS key to activate Course mode.
3) Press the PFD knob to set a Course that will center the CDI to the VOR station
or waypoint if in GPS OBS mode.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2) Turn the PFD knob to change the Course values.
OR
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-21
Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
The Vertical Deviation (Glideslope) Indicator (VDI) appears to the left of
the VSI whenever an ILS frequency is tuned in the active NAV field. A green
diamond acts as the VDI Indicator, like a glideslope needle on a conventional
indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no glideslope signal, “NO
GS” is annunciated. The glideslope on an ILS approach is only shown if the
current heading is within 90° of the selected inbound course. This prevents the
glideslope from being displayed during localizer backcourse approaches.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.7.3
Vertical Deviation Source
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Vertical Deviation Indicator
The vertical deviation is similar to the glideslope for GPS approaches
supporting WAAS vertical guidance (LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LPV, LP+V). When
an approach of this type is loaded into the flight plan and GPS is the selected
navigation source, the Vertical Deviation Indicator appears as a magenta
diamond. If the approach type downgrades to LNAV past the final approach fix
(FAF), or the approach only supports LNAV service, “NO GP” is annunciated.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 2-28 Vertical Deviation Indicator (ILS Source)
Vertical Deviation Source
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Vertical Deviation Indicator
Appendix B
Index
Figure 2-29 Vertical Deviation Indicator (GPS Source)
2-22
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
2.7.4
Auto-Slewing
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
For example, if NAV1 is currently selected, the pilot must:
press the CDI soft key twice: NAV1>GPS1>NAV1
OR
press the 1-2 soft key twice: NAV1>NAV2>NAV1
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: If the NAV course pointer is displayed for the active navigator
when the approach is activated and the localizer frequency is tuned, the
pilot will need to switch to another CDI source and then back to NAV
for the course pointer to Auto-Slew.
Sec 3
MFD
3) The CDI selection on the GDU 620 is changed to NAV course pointer for the
active navigator.
Sec 2
PFD
2) The appropriate frequency is the active frequency in the navigator.
Sec 1
System
1) The desired approach is selected and activated in the navigator (this can be
verified by the approach waypoints appearing on the GDU620 MFD Nav Map
Page or FPL Page).
Foreword
The G500H system is designed to interface with GPS navigator units and also
manage up to four different CDI course pointers (GPS1, NAV1, GPS2, NAV2)
independently. The G500H will automatically slew the NAV course pointer
to the correct final approach course when a ILS, LOC, LOC BC, LDA or SDF
approach is active in the GPS navigator and the appropriate frequency is in
the active window in the navigator. The G500H will Auto-Slew the HSI course
pointer for an ILS, LOC, LOC BC, LDA, or SDF approach when the steps below
are completed in the following order:
Sec 8
Glossary
NOTE: For LOC BC approaches, the course pointer will slew 180 degrees
from the inbound course.
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-23
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Example of activating Auto-Slewing in the G500H:
Figure 2-30 Auto-Slewing HSI with ILS Loaded and Shown with the Corresponding
Approach Plate
1) The aircraft is flying vectors to final on an active ILS approach, with the
appropriate approach in the GPS navigator.
2) The appropriate ILS frequency must be activate in the navigator.
3) Verify that the waypoints for the approach are displayed on the Nav Map Page
or the FPL Page of the MFD.
5) The CDI and course pointer will change from magenta to green and the pointer
will move, or slew, to the final approach course (or 180° from the final approach
course for LOC BC approaches).
Appendix B
Index
NOTE: If auto CDI switching is active on the GPS unit, the GPS will force
the GPS/GDU 620 to NAV when the aircraft is close to the LOC course.
Appendix A
4) Upon approaching the final course, select LOC on the HSI.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Course Pointer slewed
to 312° for the ILS
2-24
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Course Pointer slewed to
0° for the Backcourse
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
2.8.1
Supplemental Flight Data
Sec 5
Additional
Features
2.8
Bearing Pointers
• Pointer icon (BRG1 = single line, BRG2 = double line)
Appendix B
Index
The Bearing Pointer is removed from the HSI if:
• The NAV radio is not receiving the tuned VOR station
• The NAV radio is tuned to a Localizer frequency
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Appendix A
• Bearing source (GPS, NAV, or ADF)
Sec 8
Glossary
The Bearing Information windows are displayed to the lower sides of the HSI
and show:
Sec 7
Symbols
When a Bearing Pointer is displayed, its associated information window is
also displayed.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Two Bearing Pointers can be displayed on the HSI for NAV and GPS sources.
The pointers are light blue and are single- (BRG1) or double-lined (BRG2); an
icon is shown in the respective information window to indicate the pointer
type. The system must be configured for a second navigation source to show the
BRG2 selection.
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 2-31 Auto-Slewing HSI with Localizer Backcourse Loaded and Shown with the
Corresponding Approach Plate
2-25
Sec 1
System
Foreword
• GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint is not selected
• ADF is selected and a signal is not received (if you have an ADF that supports
a valid flag then the bearing pointer will be removed. If your ADF system
does not include a valid flag then the bearing pointer will still be displayed,
regardless of ADF signal validity.)
Sec 2
PFD
Bearing 2 Pointer
GPS Level
of Service
Bearing 1 Pointer
Current Navigation Source
Sec 3
MFD
CDI
Bearing 1 Source
Bearing 2 Source
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Bearing 2
Bearing 1
Pointer Icon
Pointer Icon
Figure 2-32 HSI with Bearing Information
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
GPS1
GPS2
VOR1
VOR2
LOC1
LOC2
GPS Mode
GPS Advisory
LOI
Suspend
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
MSG
LOI
CDI Source
OCN
ENR
TERM
APR
LNAV
LNAV+V
LPV
LNAV/VNAV
LP
LP+V
1.00nm
0.30nm
OBS
SUSP
Figure 2-33 PFD HSI Annunciations
1) Press the PFD soft key to display the navigation source keys.
2) Press the BRG 1 or BRG 2 soft keys to toggle between the available Nav
receivers of the selected source (such as: GPS, NAV, or ADF).
NOTE: The Bearing Line for navigation source 1 (BRG1) will be a single line.
The Bearing Line for navigation source 2 (BRG2) will be a double line.
2-26
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
2.8.2
Temperature Display
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
The outside air temperature is displayed to the left of the HSI. The air data
computer calculates the temperature based on temperature probe and pitot/
static inputs. The units (°C or °F) and temperature reference are selected on the
AUX – SYSTEM SETUP page. The temperature reference can be selected to one
of the following choices:
• Static Air Temperature (SAT) – This is the calculated temperature of the
stationary (static) outside air. Conceptually, this is the temperature that
would be read on a thermometer floating stationary at the current location.
• Total Air Temperature (TAT) – This is the calculated temperature of the
outside air as it moves past the aircraft, including the rise in temperature
due to air compression and friction at the current airspeed.
• Difference from International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) – This is the
difference between SAT and standard (ISA) temperature at the current
altitude. This provides an indication of how much warmer/colder the
temperature is from a “standard” atmosphere.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 2-34 HSI Outside Air Temperature
2.8.3
Wind Vectors
Sec 7
Symbols
When selected, wind vector information is displayed in a window on the
PFD to the left of the HSI. The Wind Vector style is configured in the Aux Mode
System Setup page. When the airspeed is less than 20 knots, the Wind Vector
window will indicate “No Wind Data.”
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Figure 2-35 Wind Vector with No Wind Data
Four styles are available as shown below.
Style 1
Style 2
Style 3
Style 4
Appendix B
Index
Figure 2-36 Wind Vector Style
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-27
DME Indication
When selected, DME information is displayed in a window in the lower left
corner of the PFD. The distance to the station and the Nav source used are
shown.
DME Information
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.8.4
Sec 2
PFD
Selected DME
Set Hold for Selected DME
Figure 2-37 DME Indication
Sec 3
MFD
NOTE: The capability of providing DME information requires installation
of the GAD 43e.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2.8.5
Marker Beacon Annunciations
A visual annunciation of marker beacons will be shown on the display when
the aircraft flies over a marker beacon. The marker beacon annunciation will
appear to the left of the altitude tape below the terrain annunciator on the PFD.
Outer Marker
Beacon Indication
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
DME Hold Annunciation
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 2-38 Marker Beacon Location
Current Beacon
Icon (Standard)
Icon (Blink)
Sec 8
Glossary
Inner Marker
Appendix A
Middle Marker
Outer Marker
Appendix B
Index
Table 2-1 Marker Beacons
2-28
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
2.8.6
Miscompare Annunciations
Threshold
200 ft
Inhibited
10 kts
7 kts
5 degrees
6 degrees
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Range of Trigger
ALL
Both IAS < 35 kts
Either IAS >= 35 kts
Either IAS >= 80 kts
ALL
ALL
Sec 3
MFD
Parameter
Altitude
Indicated Airspeed
Indicated Airspeed
Indicated Airspeed
Pitch
Roll
Sec 2
PFD
A miscompare condition is triggered if the difference between the data
reported by GDU 1 and GDU 2 exceeds the threshold described in the following
table for at least one second:
Sec 1
System
Messages will appear in the MFD alerts window if monitors are enabled and
required data is not present.
Foreword
Miscompare annunciations are capable of being displayed on the PFD if the
miscompare Monitor is enabled during the installation configuration.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
A “MISCOMP” annunciation is displayed on the airspeed tape if a miscompare
condition exists for indicated airspeed. A “MISCOMP” annunciation is displayed
on the altitude tape if a miscompare condition exists for altitude. A “PITCH
MISCOMP” annunciation is displayed over the pitch ladder if a miscompare
condition exists for pitch and not roll. A “ROLL MISCOMP” annunciation is
displayed over the pitch ladder if a miscompare condition exists for roll and
not pitch. An “ATTITUDE MISCOMP” annunciation is displayed over the pitch
ladder if a miscompare condition exists for both pitch and roll.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Table 2-2 Miscompare Conditions
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-29
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Pitch and Roll Miscompare
Airspeed
Miscompare
Altitude
Miscompare
Roll Miscompare
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Pitch Miscompare
2.9
Attitude (ATT) Sync
The ATT SYNC soft key toggles the miniature aircraft symbol between the
"absolute" pitch reference and the horizon line at the time the soft key is pressed.
The use of ATT SYNC function moves the miniature aircraft to the horizon line
and allows aircraft attitude to be controlled with more precision and less effort.
When the ATT SYNC function is active small reference marks are shown on
the sides of the attitude indicator that show the absolute pitch reference. The
miniature aircraft symbol cannot be synchronized to the horizon line if the pitch
attitude is greater than ±8º.
Pressing the ATT SYNC soft key will synchronize the aircraft symbol on
the PFD to the horizon line. The ATT SYNC soft key will not be available for
selection until the aircraft is near a level pitch attitude (within ±8º).
Attitude Sync Soft Key Label
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 2-39 Miscompare Annunciations
Attitude Sync Soft Key
Figure 2-40 Before Attitude Sync Selected
2-30
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
2-31
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 1
System
Figure 2-41 Before Attitude Sync Selected
Figure 2-42 After Attitude Sync Selected
When an optional Radar Altimeter is installed, the altitude received from the
radar altitude will be displayed on the PFD.
NOTE: See the Radar Altimeter documentation for details on the radar
altimeter performance and limitations.
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.10 Radar Altimeter
Sec 2
PFD
150 Foot Difference
Sec 3
MFD
Brown Band Indicating The Ground
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Barometric Altitude
Radar Altimeter Value
When the radar altitude is 0, the brown band will be level with the altitude
tape pointer. As the radar altitude increases above 0, the brown band will move
down the tape in an amount equal to the current radar altitude.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 2-43 Radar Altimeter Display - 150 foot RA Altitude
Sec 7
Symbols
0 Foot Difference
Sec 8
Glossary
Brown Band Indicating The Ground
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Barometric Altitude
Radar Altimeter Value
Figure 2-44 Radar Altimeter Display - 0 foot RA Altitude
The Radar Altimeter self-test process will be annunciated on the PFD above
the Radar Altimeter altitude value. The self-test is a wiring test to indicate
communication between the GDU and the Radar Altimeter. The self-test will be
cancelled after 15 seconds, the Test key is pressed again, or you leave the System
Setup page.
2-32
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
NOTE: Not all Radar Altimeters have the TEST function.
Sec 1
System
2) Press the RA TEST key. "RA TEST" will be annunciated above the Radar
Altimeter value. The Radar Altimeter value will show a certain number to
indicate that communication is taking place between the Radar Altimeter and
the GDU. See your Radar Altimeter documentation for the appropriate value.
Foreword
1) Turn the large MFD knob to Aux mode and then turn the small MFD knob to
the System Setup page.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 2-45 Radar Altimeter Test Annunciation
3) Press the RA TEST key again to stop the self-test.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 2-46 Radar Altimeter Failure Annunciation
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-33
Appendix B
Index
• An alert will arm as soon as the radar altitude is above 100 feet.
Appendix A
• An aural “One Hundred Feet” alert is always provided when descending
through 100 ft radar altitude.
Sec 8
Glossary
Additionally, the unit may be configured by the installer for the following alerts.
Sec 7
Symbols
• The minimums alerting value is defaulted OFF with a setting of 0 feet.
• The pilot can select alerts ON or OFF and can select the alert altitude
based on either barometric or radar altitude.
• The alert upon descending through the selected altitude is the aural
“minimums, minimums” callout.
• The altitude required to arm the alerting is 150 feet above the selected
altitude.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Radar Altimeter Configurations
Depending on the installation, the pilot will have one of the following options.
1) BARO or RAD ALT minimums altitude alert, pilot selectable.
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
4) If the unit fails the self-test, the RA value will not match the expected value. The
"RA FAIL" annunciation will appear on the PFD when the GDU is not receiving
any Radar Altimeter data. "RA FAIL" is not related to the self-test.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2) RAD ALT only altitude alert, pilot selectable.
• The alerting value is defaulted ON with a setting of 200 feet.
• The pilot can select alerts ON or OFF, and select the alert altitude based
on radar altitude.
• The alert upon descending through the selected altitude is a unique
tone.
• The altitude required to arm the alerting is 50 feet above the selected
altitude.
Sec 3
MFD
Additionally, the unit may be configured by the installer for the following alerts.
• An aural “One Hundred Feet” alert is always provided when descending
through 100 ft radar altitude.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• An alert will arm as soon as the radar altitude is above 100 feet.
2-34
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
3
MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY (MFD)
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
The MFD displays a color moving map with navigation information.
Moving map information is shown on the two Navigation Map pages and the
optional Weather (WX) pages. The Navigation Map displays aviation data
(e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g., cities, lake,
highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation),
and hazard data (e.g., traffic, terrain, weather). The map options set for
Navigation Map page 1 are used as the default settings for the optional
Weather (WX) pages. Which data is displayed can be controlled by the
DCLTR soft key and map page MENU selections. The Navigation Map can
be oriented four different ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRACK
UP), Desired Track Up (DTK UP), or Heading Up (HDG UP).
Sec 3
MFD
Map Orientation
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Range Select
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Page Group
Menu
Clear
Page Label
Enter
Page Group Position
SD Card Slots
Soft Keys
Soft Key Labels
Sec 8
Glossary
Large MFD Knob
(Select Page Group)
Sec 7
Symbols
Small MFD Knob
(Select Page)
Figure 3-1 MFD Description
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-1
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Appendix A
The nose of the aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the
location corresponding to the calculated present position. The aircraft
position and the flight plan legs are based on information received from the
currently selected GPS navigator. The leg of the active flight plan currently
being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation map. The other
legs are shown in white.
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
3.1
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Navigation Map Pages
Map displays are used extensively in the GDU 620 to provide situational
awareness in flight. The following information can be displayed on the
Navigation Map Pages:
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspace,
• Track vector
airways, land data (highways,
• Topography scale
cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.)
• Topography data
with names
• XM NEXRAD Weather
• Map Pointer information (distance
and bearing to pointer, location of
pointer, name, and other pertinent
information)
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
There are map ranges available, from 500 feet to 500 NM. The range
is now indicated in the box on the range ring at the 11 o-clock position
relative to the ownship. To change the map range on any map, press the
RNG keys on the right side of the bezel.
• Map range
• Wind direction and speed
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• Map orientation
• Icons for enabled map features
• Aircraft icon (representing present
position)
• XM Lightning
• XM Storm Cells
• Traffic
• Stormscope
• Top of Climb
• Terrain data (includes terrain,
obstacles, and power lines)
• Nav range ring
Symbols used on the MFD are detailed in Section 7.
NOTE: Page Group and Page are shown at the bottom of the MFD.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
• Flight plan legs
Page
Turn Small MFD knob
Appendix B
Index
Page Group
Turn Large MFD knob
Figure 3-2 Page Group and Page Locator
3-2
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Wind Vector and Speed
TFR Data Window
Foreword
Map Orientation
Obstacles
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Traffic Icons
with Relative
Altitude and Trend
Indicator
Elevation Window
Sec 3
MFD
Aircraft Symbol
(Present Position)
Topo Scale
Map Overlay Icons
Page Location
Page Name
3.1.1
Default Navigation Map Page
3.1.2
Map Overlay Icons
Appendix B
Index
Obstacle
Wire Obstacle
Traffic
ADS-R/TIS-B Traffic
Figure 3-4 Map Overlay Icon Samples
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Appendix A
Terrain
Sec 8
Glossary
Stormscope
Sec 7
Symbols
Overlay icons are displayed to indicate data that will be depicted on the
map pages. The icons are shown onIf the icon is not displayed, either the
menu selection is not ON to display the data or the display range makes the
data ineligible for display. If the icon has a white X over it then the data is
selected ON and the zoom scale is correct, but the underlying data is not
available for some reason. All of the icons may not be displayed at the same
time. In some cases if one feature is selected, another icon and featuare may
be disabled. The pilot should check the dedicated page for the feature that
the icon represents to determine why the data is not available for display
(fail, standby, etc).
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
While on any page of the MFD, you may easily return to the first Navigation
Map page of the Map group by pressing and holding the CLR key to return
to the first page (Home Page) of the Map group.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 3-3 MFD Map Description
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Symbols Indicates
Features Displayed
3-3
Selecting Page Options
1) Change the fields or the setup of a page by pressing the MENU key and make
the necessary adjustments with the MFD knobs.
2) Turn the large MFD knob to select desired item.
3) Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value.
4) Press ENT to accept the displayed value.
5) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing.
3.1.4
Changing the Navigation Map Range
The Range (RNG) keys on the right side of the bezel are used to change the
map display range. Pressing the
RNG key will zoom out (increasing the
displayed map range) and pressing the
RNG key will zoom in (decreasing
the displayed map range). The Map Range is shown on the outer range ring. The
map ranges available are from 250 feet to 500 NM.
3.1.5
Decluttering Map Pages
The Map Declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through
four levels of decluttering to remove map information. The declutter level is
displayed in the DCLTR soft key.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3.1.3
1) There are four levels of decluttering. DCLTR (0) shows the most detail. DCLTR-3
removes the most detail.
2) While viewing one of the Navigation Map pages, press the DCLTR soft key.
Each successive press of the DCLTR soft key will toggle through the declutter
levels. In the following table, features marked with a “•” are shown at the
indicated Declutter Level. Features shown at level 0 will be displayed at all
Declutter levels.
NOTE: Traffic is automatically decluttered from Nav Map pages when the
map scale is above 40 NM.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-5 Map Declutter Soft Key
3-4
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Feature
0
1
2
3
Feature
0
1
2
3
•
Tower
•
•
•
TRSA
•
•
Large City
•
ADIZ
•
•
Medium City
•
Alert Areas
•
•
Small City
•
Caution Areas
•
•
Small Town
•
Danger Areas
•
•
Freeways
•
Warning Areas
•
•
Highways
•
Large Airports
•
•
•
Roads
•
Medium Airports
•
•
•
Railroads
•
Prohibited Areas
•
•
•
Political Boundaries
•
MOAs
•
•
•
Traffic Symbols
•
Runway Labels
•
•
•
Lat/Lon Grids
•
•
Lightning Strike Data
•
•
•
VORs
•
•
NEXRAD Data
•
•
•
NDBs
•
•
River/Lake Names
•
•
•
•
Intersections
•
•
Traffic Labels
•
•
•
•
Class B Airspace
•
•
Water Detail
•
•
•
•
Class C Airspace
•
•
Active FPL Legs
•
•
•
•
Class D Airspace
•
•
Foreword
Airways
Land/Country Text
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Table 3-1 Features Shown at Each Decluttering Level
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-5
Panning
The Panning Map Page function allows you to move the map beyond its
current limits without adjusting the map scale and to examine information at
the pointer location. When you select the panning function — by pressing the
small MFD knob — a target pointer flashes on the map display. A window also
appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position
of the pointer, the ETE from your present position to the pointer, elevation at
the pointer, and bearing and distance to the pointer from your present position.
Information is related
to the tip of the pointer
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3.1.6
Selected Point
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Map Pointer
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Present Position
1) While viewing a Map, press the small MFD knob. A flashing pointer will
appear in the tip of the ownship symbol. As the arrow is moved, the measured
information is referenced to the tip of the arrow.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-6 Navigation Map Pointer Location Information
Figure 3-7 Navigation Map Initial Pointer Location
2) Turn the large MFD knob to move the cursor horizontally. Turn the small MFD
knob to move the cursor vertically.
3) Press the small MFD knob again to cancel panning. The display will return to
the previous map view.
3-6
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
3.1.7
Selecting Items on the Map
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
When the target pointer is placed on an object, the name of that object is
highlighted (even if the name wasn’t originally displayed on the map). This
feature applies to airports, NAVAIDs, user-created waypoints, roads, lakes,
rivers — just about everything displayed on the map except route lines. When
an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint is selected on the map display, you can
review information about the item.
1) While viewing the Navigation Map pages of the Map page group, press the
small MFD knob to activate panning.
2) Move the cursor with the small and large MFD knobs to highlight a feature.
Sec 3
MFD
3) Press ENT to display information about the highlighted feature.
4) Press one of the soft keys for details of the selected topic.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
5) Press the small MFD knob again to return to panning.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-7
Measuring Distances
The “Measure Bearing/Distance” function provides a quick and easy method
to determine the bearing and distance between any two points on the Navigation
Map.
1) While viewing one of the Navigation Map pages of the Map page group, press
MENU.
2) Turn the large or small MFD knobs to highlight “Measure Bearing/
Distance“ and then press ENT.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3.1.8
3) Your present position will be marked as the starting reference point. To choose a
different starting reference point, turn the large or small MFD knobs to desired
point and press ENT.
Figure 3-9 Measure Distance Starting Reference Point
4) Turn the large or small MFD knobs to move the cursor to a reference point. The
distance and bearing is displayed at the top of the display.
Ending Reference
Point position
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 3-8 Navigation Map Measure Distance Function
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Ending Reference Point
Appendix B
Index
Starting Reference Point
Figure 3-10 Bearing/Distance Measurement
5) Press the small MFD knob to stop measuring.
3-8
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
3.1.9
Customizing Navigation Map Pages
Map Setup
Sec 3
MFD
1) While viewing one of the Navigation Map pages of the Map page group, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map Page Menu.
Sec 2
PFD
The Map Setup selection from the Page Menu allows you to select which data
will be displayed on the map.
Sec 1
System
3.1.10
Foreword
The Navigation Map pages are customized by selecting options from the Page
Menu. The Page Menu options include choices for Map Setup and Measure
Bearing/Distance. The Map Setup choice covers selections for Map, Weather,
Traffic, and Aviation depending on the installed equipment of a given aircraft.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 7
Symbols
3) Use the large and small MFD knobs to select the Group (Map, Weather,
Traffic, or Aviation) and press ENT to allow editing of the selected group. The
groups shown depend on the features available for equipment installed in your
aircraft.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2) With the cursor flashing on the “Map Setup” option. Press the ENT key to
display the Map Setup Menu.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 3-11 Navigation Map Page Menu
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Figure 3-12 Navigation Map Page Menu Map Group Selection
4) Press the small MFD knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-9
Adjustment
Menu
Item
Orientation
Direction
NEXRAD
Viewing
Range
Off/Range
North Up At
Off/Range
NEXRAD
Cell Mov
Auto Zoom
On/Off
Land Data
On/Off
Track Vector
Length
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix B
Index
Traffic Group
(optional)
Adjustment Menu
Item
Aviation Group
Adjustment
Menu
Item
Adjustment
Off/Modes
Safe Taxi
Viewing
Range
Off/Range
Off/Range
Rwy
Extension
Range
Off/Range
NEXRAD
Legend
On/Off
INT/NDB
Viewing
Range *
Off/Range
XM Ltng
Off/Range
VOR
Viewing
Range*
Off/Range
Off/Time
Class B/
TMA *
Off/Range
Wind Vector
On/Off
Class C/
TCA *
Off/Range
Enhanced
Range Ring
On/Off
Class D *
Off/Range
Topo Data
On/Off
Restricted*
Off/Range
Topo Scale
On/Off
MOA
(Military)*
Off/Range
Terrain Data
On/Off
Other/
ADIZ *
Off/Range
Obstacle
Viewing
Range
Off/Range
TFR *
Off/Range
Power Line
Viewing
Range
Off/Range
Airways
Off/Modes
Lat/Lon
Viewing
Range
Off/Range
Smart
Airspace
On/Off
Selected Alt
Range Arc
On/Off
Show
Airspaces
All/Altitude
Field of
View**
On/Off
Airspace
Labels
On/Off
Sec 1
System
Menu
Item
Sec 3
MFD
Weather Group
(optional)
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Foreword
Map Group
Traffic
* - shown if the Aviation database is current. ** - shown if Synthetic Vision is available.
Table 3-2 Navigation Map Page Menu Selections
3-10
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
3.1.10.1
Map Feature Options
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
2) Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value.
Foreword
Choose the options to determine the values for display on each Navigation
Map. The options you save will be retained until changed. The options may be
selecting by using the following procedure:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map 1 or 2 of the Map page group, press the
MENU key. With “Map Setup” highlighted, press ENT. With the Map Group
active, turn the large MFD knob to highlight the desired option.
3) Press ENT to accept the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Map Orientation
Sec 3
MFD
4) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
The Orientation option sets the orientation of the Navigation Map.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-13 Navigation Map Orientation
North Up At
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
The North Up At option allows you to select the map range where at and
above the selected value the Map Orientation will automatically change to North
Up. For example, with the 500 NM value selected and the map range of the MFD
is 500 NM or more, the map orientation will automatically become North Up.
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-11
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Auto Zoom
With a valid flight plan, the Auto Zoom feature will automatically change the
Navigation Map range depending on the distance to the next waypoint in the
flight plan. If enabled, it will also automatically zoom to the SafeTaxi zoom range
when the aircraft is on the ground. Auto Zoom can be overridden at any time by
manually zooming with the RNG keys or enabling OBS mode. Auto Zoom is reenabled once one of the following conditions is met:
The Land Data option selects whether detailed land features, such as rivers,
roads, cities, are displayed. Topo features, traffic, terrain, and obstacles will still
be displayed, even with Land Data turned off.
Track Vector Length
When turned on, the Track Vector Length option will show a dashed line
and arrow extending from the aircraft icon illustrating the current Track and the
distance the aircraft will travel in the selected time.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Land Data
Track Vector
Figure 3-14 Navigation Map Track Vector
Wind Vector
The Wind Vector option when turned on will show a box in the top right
corner of the MFD indicating the wind direction and speed.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Aircraft Present Position
Wind Direction
Wind Speed
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Figure 3-15 Navigation Map Wind Vector Display
3-12
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Nav Range Ring
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Range Ring Radius
Foreword
When turned on, the Nav Range Ring option will show a ring with a compass
rose oriented to magnetic north around your present position on the Map page.
When selected ON, the Enhanced Range Ring function provides a second ring
at 1/2 the distance of the primary ring to allow the pilot to acccurately judge
distance to objects depicted on the map.
Range Ring with Compass Rose
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 3-16 Navigation Map Range Ring
Topo Data
Topo Data Off
Sec 5
Additional
Features
The Topo Data option selects whether the colored topographical features are
displayed. Traffic, Land Data, Terrain, and Obstacles will still be displayed even
with Topo Data turned off.
Topo Data On
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Figure 3-17 Navigation Map Topo Data
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-13
Minimum/Maximum
Range of Topography
Displayed on the Map
Sky Indication
Range of Topography
Displayed on the Map
Current Aircraft Altitude
Current Ground Level Indication
Figure 3-18 Navigation Map Topo Scale
Terrain Data
The Terrain Data option selects whether Terrain Data is shown on the
Navigation Map. The Terrain Data Icon
will be shown when Terrain has
been selected. Terrain and Topo data displays are mutually exclusive.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Topo Scale
The Topo Scale option selects whether the elevation scale for topographical
features on the Navigation Map is displayed. The scale will be located on the
right side of the display.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Terrain Data
Terrain Data Icon
Figure 3-19 Navigation Map Terrain Data
3-14
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Obstacle Data Viewing Range
Foreword
Sec 1
System
The Obstacle Data Viewing Range option selects whether the Obstacle Data
is shown on the Navigation Map. Obstacles will be shown at and below the
selected map range. Map ranges above this value will not show the Obstacle
Data. In the range selection example below where 30 NM is selected, obstacles
will be shown at map ranges of 30 NM and lower.
Terrain is more than 250 ft above
the aircraft altitude (Red)
500 ft
Terrain is between 0 ft and 250 ft below the aircraft altitude (Yellow)
Sec 3
MFD
250 ft
Sec 2
PFD
Terrain is between
0 ft and 250 ft above
the aircraft altitude
(Orange)
250 ft
Terrain is between 250 ft and 500 ft below the aircraft altitude (Green)
Figure 3-20 TERRAIN Altitude/Color Correlation
Lighted Obstacle
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Appendix B
Index
Table 3-3 HSVT Terrain Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Appendix A
White
Terrain/Obstacle
at or above
WARNING
current aircraft
(Red)
altitude
Terrain/Obstacle
between 250 ft
CAUTION
and 0 ft below
(Yellow)
current aircraft
altitude
Terrain/Obstacle
250 ft, or more,
below current
aircraft altitude
Sec 8
Glossary
Yellow
Alert
Level
Sec 7
Symbols
Red
Terrain/
Obstacle
Location
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Obstacle Symbol
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Potential
Impact
Points Terrain
Color
< 1000 ft > 1000 ft < 1000 ft > 1000 ft
AGL
AGL
AGL
AGL
Unlighted
Obstacle
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Terrain more than 500 ft below the aircraft altitude (Black)
3-15
Windmill
Windmill in Group
Power Line
Foreword
Tower
Sec 1
System
Table 3-4 Obstacle Icon Types
Red Obstacles Are
At Or Above Aircraft
Sec 2
PFD
White Obstacles Are 250 feet
Or More Below Aircraft
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Yellow Obstacles Are Between
0 ft and 250 ft Below Aircraft
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 3-21 Navigation Map Obstacle Data
Obstacle is at or above the aircraft altitude (Red)
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
250 ft
250 ft
Obstacle is 250 ft, or more,
below the aircraft altitude (White)
Sec 7
Symbols
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix B
Index
Obstacle is between 250 ft and 0 ft
below the aircraft altitude (Yellow)
Figure 3-22 H-TAWS Obstacle Altitude Colors and Symbology
Grouped obstacles are shown with an asterisk (as shown in the Windmill in
Group example above). The color of the asterisks is tied to the relative altitude
of the highest obstacle in the group, not other obstacles within that group.
Obstacles are grouped when they would otherwise overlap. If map zoom scale
is change sufficiently that obstacles can be drawn without overlapping they will
be depicted individually.
Obstacle databases created for software version 7.00 or later may include
HOT lines depending on the type of obstacle database installed. Hazardous
Obstacle Transmission (HOT) Lines are those power lines that that have been
identified as a potential hazard to aircraft. The installed obstacle database type
3-16
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 1
System
Lat/Lon Viewing Range
The Lat/Lon Viewing Range option selects whether Lat/Lon line is shown on
the MFD.
Foreword
can be verified on the System Status page. Power line data is available for the
contiguous United States as well as small parts of Canada and Mexico.
Sec 2
PFD
Lat/Lon Reference Information
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 3-23 Navigation Map Lat/Lon Information
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-17
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Field of View
The Field of View represented by the synthetic terrain data used for the
Garmin Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT™) option (when enabled) can be
represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page lateral image. Two dashed lines
forming a V-shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the MFD, represent the
forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Field of View Borders
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-24 Navigation Map Field of View on the MFD
3-18
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Selected Altitude Range Arc
Foreword
Sec 1
System
The range to altitude arc may be selected for display on the MFD navigation
map to predict where the ownship will be when it reaches the altitude selected
on the altitude alerter on the PFD. The distance from the ownship to the arc is
based on ground speed, baro altitude, selected altitude, and vertical speed. The
arc is shown when the aircraft is moving toward the selected altitude at a vertical
speed of at least 150 feet per minute.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Selected Altitude
Range Arc
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 3-25 Selected Altitude Range Arc
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-19
Weather Feature Options (Optional)
The Weather group selection from the Map Setup Page Menu allows you
to customize the NEXRAD Viewing Range, NEXRAD Cell Movement, and
Lightning Viewing range. Weather is an optional feature that requires a GDL
69/69A and an XM WX Satellite Weather subscription, or other weather product
(such as GFDS).
1) While viewing the Navigation Map 1 or 2 page of the Map page group, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map Page Menu.
Figure 3-26 Navigation Map Page Menu
2) With the cursor flashing on the “Map Setup” option, press the ENT key to
display the Map Setup Menu.
3) Use the large and small MFD knobs to select the Weather Group and press
ENT to allow editing of the selected group. The groups shown depend on the
features available for equipment installed in your aircraft.
Figure 3-27 Navigation Map Page Menu Weather Group Selection
4) Press the small MFD knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3.1.10.2
3-20
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
NEXRAD Data Viewing Range
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
The NEXRAD Legend selection provides the option of displaying an
abbreviated version of the NEXRAD legend in the top right region of the MFD.
Sec 3
MFD
NEXRAD Legend
Sec 2
PFD
The NEXRAD Cell Movement option selects whether NEXRAD Cell Movement
is shown on the Navigation Map.
Sec 1
System
NEXRAD Cell Movement
Foreword
The NEXRAD Viewing Range option selects whether the NEXRAD weather
products is shown on the MFD. NEXRAD weather products will be shown at
and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, NEXRAD weather will
not be shown. Map ranges above the selected value will not show the NEXRAD
weather products. Where 100 NM is selected, the NEXRAD weather products
will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-28 NEXRAD Legend Selection
Datalink Lightning Viewing Range
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
The Lightning Viewing Range option selects whether the datalink provided
Lightning weather products is shown on the Navigation Map. Lightning
weather products will be shown at and below the selected map range. When
Off is selected, Lightning weather will not be shown. Where 100 NM is selected,
Lightning symbols will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-21
The XM or FIS-B NEXRAD Source selection allows the choice of the available
sources for NEXRAD weather products.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
XM/FIS-B NEXRAD Source
Figure 3-29 NEXRAD Weather Source Selection
The Stormscope Viewing Range option selects Stormscope cells or strikes are
shown on the Navigation Map. Products will be shown at and below the selected
map range. When Off is selected, cells or strikes will not be shown. Where
100 NM is selected, symbols will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
NOTE: The selected lightning display type, cell or strike, will be shown the
same on both the StormScope and the Map pages.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Stormscope® Viewing Range
Sec 7
Symbols
NOTE: StormScope data is displayed on the Map Page only if aircraft
heading is available.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
NOTE: The G500/600 will display StormScope data with or without a
heading source. If no heading source is available, the display will indicate
this by placing “HDG N/A” in the upper right portion of the display. If no
heading is available, the pilot must clear the strikes after each heading
change.
Strike/Cell Mode
When the Stormscope Viewing Range option has a range greater than zero,
the Stormscope cells or strikes option is made available and can determine
which type are shown on the Navigation Map.
3-22
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 2
PFD
Display Result
No traffic displayed
All types of traffic displayed
Traffic Alerts and Proximity Alerts displayed
Traffic Alerts Only displayed
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Traffic Selection
Off
All Traffic
TA/PA
TA Only
Sec 1
System
NOTE: As a decluttering function, traffic labels will not be drawn when the
map scale is above 15 NM and traffic symbols will not be drawn when the
map scale is above 40 NM.
Foreword
3.1.10.3 Traffic Feature Options (Optional)
The Traffic group selection from the Map Setup Page Menu allows you to
customize the display of traffic on the Navigation Map. The Traffic function
requires the installation of a compatible traffic device.
Table 3-4 Navigation Map Traffic Display Options
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 3-30 Navigation Map Page Menu Traffic Group Selection
Sec 7
Symbols
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Setup page and the Traffic Group active,
turn the large MFD knob to highlight the “Traffic” options.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
Figure 3-31 Navigation Map Page Menu Traffic Options
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-23
3) Press ENT to accept the displayed value.
4) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
When the Traffic overlay is active on a Map page, a Traffic icon will be
displayed on the Map page where it is selected.
Figure 3-32 Navigation Map Traffic Overlay
3.1.10.4 Aviation Feature Options
The Aviation group selection from the Map Setup Page Menu allows you to
customize the display of SafeTaxi information, Runway Extensions, Intersection/
NDB locations, VOR locations, and TFR icons on the Navigation Map.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Traffic Overlay
Selected Icon
Traffic Overlay
Smart Key Label
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2) Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value.
Figure 3-33 Navigation Map Page Menu Aviation Group Selection
SafeTaxi™ Viewing Range
The SafeTaxi™ viewing range option selects the range at which SafeTaxi
information is shown on the Navigation Map. SafeTaxi will be shown at and
below the selected map range. When Off is selected, SafeTaxi information will
not be shown. Where 1 NM is selected, the SafeTaxi information will be shown
at map ranges of 1 NM and lower.
Runway Extension Range
The Runway Extension Range option selects the whether Runway Extensions
is shown for the flight plan destination airport runway. Runway Extensions will
be shown at and below the selected map range and will extend 10 NM. When
Off is selected, Runway Extensions will not be shown.
3-24
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
3-25
Sec 8
Glossary
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 7
Symbols
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The Restricted airspace viewing range option selects whether the map range
is shown on the Navigation Map. Restricted airspace information will be shown
at and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, the information will
not be shown. Where 100 NM is selected, Restricted airspace information will
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Restricted Airspace Viewing Range
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Class D Airspace Viewing Range
The Class D airspace viewing range option selects whether Class D airspace
information is shown on the Navigation Map. Class D airspace information
will be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, the
information will not be shown. Where 100 NM is selected, Class D airspace
information will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
Sec 3
MFD
Class C/TCA Airspace Viewing Range
The Class C/TCA airspace viewing range option selects whether Class C/TCA
airspace information is shown on the Navigation Map. Class C/TCA airspace
information will be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is
selected, the information will not be shown. Where 100 NM is selected, Class
C/TCA airspace information will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
Sec 2
PFD
Class B/TMA Airspace Viewing Range
The Class B/TMA airspace viewing range option selects whether Class B/TMA
airspace information is shown on the Navigation Map. Class B/TMA airspace
information will be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is
selected, the information will not be shown. Where 100 NM is selected, Class B/
TMA airspace information will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
Sec 1
System
VOR Viewing Range
The VOR viewing range option selects whether VOR information is shown
on the Navigation Map. VOR information will be shown at and below the
selected map range. When Off is selected, the information will not be shown. In
the example below where 150 NM is selected, VOR information will be shown
at map ranges of 150 NM and lower.
Foreword
INT/NDB Viewing Range
The INT/NDB viewing range option selects whether Intersection and NDB
information is shown on the Navigation Map. Intersection and NDB information
will be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, the
information will not be shown. In the example below where 15 NM is selected,
INT/NDBs will be shown at map ranges of 15 NM and lower.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
MOA (Military) Viewing Range
The MOA (Military) viewing range option selects whether MOA (Military)
information is shown on the Navigation Map. MOA airspace information will
be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, the
information will not be shown. Where 100 NM is selected, MOA airspace
information will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
Other/ADIZ Airspace Viewing Range
The Other/ADIZ airspace viewing range option selects whether Other/ADIZ
airspace information is shown on the Navigation Map. Other/ADIZ airspace
information will be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is
selected, the information will not be shown. Where 100 NM is selected, Other/
ADIZ airspace information will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
TFR Viewing Range (optional)
The Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) viewing range option selects
whether TFR information is shown on the Navigation Map. TFR information
will be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, the
information will not be shown. Where 100 NM is selected, TFR information will
be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower. This optional feature requires
an active data link receiver. TFRs are provided through the datalink. Some TFRs
may exist that are not available to the datalink provider and as such will not be
displayed.
Airways
The Airways option allows you to select the airways that are shown on the
Navigation Map. All, Low only, and Hi only Airways may be selected. When Off
is selected, airways will not be shown.
Smart Airspace
The Smart Airspaces selection filters airspaces to show the ones appropriate for
your altitude. Garmin’s Smart Airspace™ feature aids visual clarity on-screen by
de-emphasizing airspace that’s well above or below the aircraft’s current altitude.
The vertical separation is 1,000 feet at sea level and the vertical separation will
gradually increase to 2,000 feet until the aircraft reaches 10,000 feet. Anything
above 10,000 feet keeps the 2,000 feet vertical separation.
3-26
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Smart Airspaces - De-Emphasized
Foreword
NOTE: Smart Airspace only changes the depiction of the airspace on the
moving map display. It does not alter the Airspace Alerts that can be set
on the System-Alerts portion of the system.
Smart Airspaces - Emphasized (On)
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
The Airspace viewing range options select whether the Airspaces are shown
on the Map and at and below the selected map ranges.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Show Airspace
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 3-34 Display of Smart Airspaces (Airspace Borders Grayed When Emphasized)
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-35 Display of Smart Airspaces
Airspace Labels
Sec 8
Glossary
The Airspace Label feature shows the airspace altitude limits within the
selected range.
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
Airspace Labels
Figure 3-36 Airspace Labels
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-27
Split Screen (Optional)
External Video is an optional function that displays video provided by an
externally mounted video source on the aircraft. The Map Display setup will
reflect the setup for MAP PAGE 1 except that TERRAIN, TOPO, and TRAFFIC
can be turned on and off separately on this page.
1) While viewing the Map function, turn the small MFD knob to the third
Navigation Map page.
Current Video Source
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3.1.11
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Display of External Video Source
Figure 3-37 External Video
2) The External Video page will show the external video on the top half of the
MFD and a Navigation Map will be shown on the lower half.
3) To select the other external video source, press the MENU key.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Map Display
Selected Video Source
Figure 3-38 Aux Mode System Setup Page Menu
4) Turn the large or small MFD knobs to highlight the Video selection and then
press ENT.
3-28
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
3.2
Aux Mode Pages
3.2.1
Foreword
The Aux mode provides pages for System Setup, XM Information (if installed),
and system Status.
System Settings
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
G500H system settings are managed from the Aux Mode System Setup Page.
The following settings can be changed:
• Display Brightness (Mode and Level)
• Airspeeds (Glide, VR, VX, and VY)
• PFD Options (Wind Vector, Nav Status Styles, and Temp Reference)
• Dual Unit Synchronization (CDI, Baro, and some Databases)
• Date/Time (Date, Time, Time Format, and Time Offset)
• MFD Display Units (Distance/Speed and Altitude/Vertical Speed)
• System Display Units (Navigation Angle Reference, Pressure Units, and
Temperature Units)
• Data Link (FIS, XM, GFDS)
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
Figure 3-39 Aux Mode System Setup Page
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-29
NOTE: Not all Radar Altimeters have the TEST function.
1) While viewing the Aux mode System Setup page, press the MENU key.
Figure 3-40 Aux Mode System Setup Page Menu
2) Turn the large or small MFD knobs to highlight the desired selection and then
press ENT.
3.2.1.1
Display Brightness
Display brightness mode may be set to manual or automatic. The automatic
mode will set the display brightness based on the ambient light. The manual
mode allows the setting of display brightness between 0 and 100%.
1) Turn the large MFD knob to reach the AUX page group. Press the small MFD
knob to activate the cursor.
2) The Level will be highlighted. Turn the small MFD knob to select the Display
Brightness Level and then press ENT.
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
The default values set by the installer during installation are restored by using
the Page Menu options or soft keys. The “Restore Unit Defaults” menu selection
and the DFLT UNIT soft key restores the default MFD Display and System
Display Units settings. The “Restore Airspeed Defaults” menu selection or DFLT
SPD soft key restores the default PFD Airspeeds settings.
The RA TEST soft key activates the Radar Altimeter test mode. See the Radio
Altimeter section in Section 2 for details.
Figure 3-41 Aux Mode Display Brightness Level Selection
3) If the Level was changed, Manual will be selected. Press the cursor to save the
settings. If you press ENT the Mode setting will be highlighted.
4) With the Mode value highlighted, turn the small MFD knob to select Auto or
Manual and then press ENT.
3-30
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Figure 3-42 Aux Mode Display Brightness Mode Selection
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: When power is cycled, the Airspeed Reference values are reset.
During preflight, the Airspeed Reference values should be checked and
set appropriately for the current aircraft configuration and performance.
Sec 2
PFD
3.2.1.2
Airspeed Reference Marks
The airspeed reference marks for the PFD are adjusted with this function.
A marker will appear on the PFD Airspeed tape at the selected speed when the
value is set to “On.” Default reference airspeeds are set during installation. When
power is cycled, the values you set will be reset to the default values.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Figure 3-43 Airspeed References shown on PFD when activated
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-31
Foreword
PFD Options - Wind Vector
When selected, wind vector information is displayed on the PFD to the left of
the HSI. Four styles are available.
Sec 1
System
3.2.1.3
1) While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group, press the small
MFD knob to activate the cursor. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the
desired Wind Vector value.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
2) Turn the small MFD knob to select the style and press ENT.
Style 2
Style 3
Style 4
Figure 3-44 Wind Vector Style
3) When a Wind Vector style is selected, a Wind Vector box with the chosen style
will be displayed to the left of the HSI on the PFD. When OFF is selected, the
Wind Vector box will not be displayed.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Style 1
3-32
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
3.2.1.4
PFD Options - Nav Status
When selected, Nav Status information is displayed on the PFD either on the
top of the display (Style 1) or to the left of the HSI (Style 2).
Foreword
1) While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group, press the small
MFD knob to activate the cursor. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the
desired Nav Status value.
Sec 1
System
2) Turn the small MFD knob to select the style and press ENT.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Style 1 - Top of Display
Style 2 - Left of HSI
NOTE: Nav Status option is not available for all installations.
3-33
Appendix B
Index
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Appendix A
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 8
Glossary
3.2.1.5
Temperature Reference
The computer calculates the temperature based on temperature probe and
pitot/static inputs. The units (°C or °F) and temperature reference are selected
on the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP page. The temperature reference can be selected
to one of the following choices:
• Static Air Temperature (SAT) – This is the calculated temperature of the
stationary (static) outside air. Conceptually, this is the temperature that
would be read on a thermometer floating stationary at the current location.
• Total Air Temperature (TAT) – This is the calculated temperature of the
outside air as it moves past the aircraft, including the rise in temperature
due to air compression and friction at the current airspeed.
Sec 7
Symbols
3) After the Nav Status style is selected, the chosen style will be displayed on the
PFD.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 3-45 Nav Status Style
Foreword
Sec 1
System
1) While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group, press the small
MFD knob to activate the cursor. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the
desired Temp Reference value.
2) Turn the small MFD knob to select the Temp Reference type and press ENT.
Figure 3-46 Outside Air Temperature Selection
3.2.1.6
Synchronization (Dual Installations Only)
Dual GDU 620 units when connected in the aircraft may be set up to
communicate and share information by “Crossfilling” or synchronizing
information between the two units.
Crossfill synchronization for CDI and Baro Corrections are selected in the
System Setup page of the Aux page group. Database Synchronization is managed
in the DB Sync function on the System Status page of the Aux page group.
1) While viewing the first page of the AUX page group, press the small MFD knob
and turn the large MFD knob to highlight “CDI,” “BARO,” or “Databases” in
the “Synchronization” box in both units.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
• Difference from International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) – This is the
difference between SAT and standard (ISA) temperature at the current
altitude. This provides an indication of how much warmer/colder the
temperature is from a “standard” atmosphere.
Figure 3-47 Dual Unit Synchronization
2) Turn the small MFD knob to select “ON” or “OFF.”
3) Press ENT.
3-34
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Selected Altitude
Selected Heading
Selected Course
Selected Vertical Speed
Airspeed Bug Values
Airspeed Color Band Values
System Pressure Units
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The following information can be synchronized between GDU 620s, or
changed independently, depending on the Crossfill Synchronization Settings:
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• Barometric Correction (default ON)
• Selected CDI (default OFF)
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
3-35
Sec 8
Glossary
The CDI soft key toggles between selection of GPS or VOR/LOC as the active
navigation source. In a single GDU 620 system, the GDU CDI soft key will
change the source in the connected navigator and making a source change in the
navigator will be reflected in the GDU 620. In a dual GDU 620 system, the CDI
keys in the navigator are disabled.
Sec 7
Symbols
AHRS 1 and ADC 1 will only be displayed on GDU1. AHRS2 and ADC2 will
only be displayed on GDU2.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
When the CDI is synchronized, any changes to the selected CDI on either
GDU will change it on both GDUs. Either pilot can change the OBS course on
either GPS. If the pilot selects GPS1 on the CDI and GPS1 is in OBS mode, any
course changes will move the OBS on GPS1, GDU1, and GDU2 (if the copilot
has GPS1 displayed on the CDI). Similarly, if the pilot selects GPS2 on the CDI
and GPS2 is in OBS mode, any course changes will move the OBS on GPS2,
GDU1, and GDU2 (if the copilot has GPS2 displayed on the CDI).
Sec 5
Additional
Features
When Barometric Correction is synchronized, any changes to the Barometric
Setting on either GDU will change it on both GDUs.
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 3
MFD
• System Temperature Units
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
The following information is always synchronized between both GDU 620
units:
Date and Time
The Date and Time options allow you to select the time to change UTC time
to local time with a time offset.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3.2.1.7
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 3-48 Time Format and Offset
Time Zone
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Atlantic
Eastern
Central
Mountain
Pacific
Alaskan
Hawaiian
Local Standard Time
Offset
-4 hours
-5 hours
-6 hours
-7 hours
-8 hours
-9 hours
-10 hours
Local Daylight Savings
Time Offset
-3 hours
-4 hours
-5 hours
-6 hours
-7 hours
-8 hours
-9 hours
2) Turn the small MFD knob to select Local 12hr, Local 24hr, or UTC and then
press ENT. When Local 12 or 24 hr mode is selected, the Time Offset value will
then be highlighted.
3) Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired offset and then press ENT.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 7
Symbols
1) While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group, press the small
MFD knob to activate the cursor. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight “Time
Format.”
Sec 8
Glossary
Table 3-5 U.S. Time Zone Offsets
3-36
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Figure 3-49 Date and Time Values
3.2.1.8
Sec 3
MFD
5) Press the small MFD knob to exit adjustments.
Sec 2
PFD
4) A Time Offset may be entered by using the large and small MFD knobs to
change the values. Press ENT after completing any changes.
MFD Display Units
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The MFD Display Units options allow you to select the units of measurement
conventions displayed on the MFD. Distance and Speed selections are Imperial,
Metric, or Nautical. Altitude and Vertical speed selections are Feet or Meters.
ffic information is always shown in Nautical Miles (distance) and Feet (altitude).
1) While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group, press the small
MFD knob to activate the cursor. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the
Distance and Speed (DIS, SPD) units of measurement.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 3-50 Distance and Speed MFD Display Units
3) Turn the small MFD knob to select Feet or Meters and then press ENT.
Appendix A
2) Turn the small MFD knob to select Imperial, Metric, or Nautical and then press
ENT. The Altitude and Vertical Speed units selection will now be highlighted.
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-37
Foreword
Sec 1
System
3.2.1.9
System Display Units
The System Display Units options allows the selection of units to display
values for Navigation Angle (Magnetic or True), Barometric Setting (inches or
Hectopascals), and Temperature (Fahrenheit or Celsius). Pressing the DFLT
UNIT soft key will restore the Default Unit settings.
1) While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group, press the small
MFD knob to activate the cursor. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the
System Display Units selection titled “Nav Angle.”
CAUTION: The Nav Angle display units (Magnetic or True) must be set to
the same type in both the GDU 620 and GPS navigators.
Figure 3-52 Nav Angle System Display Units
2) Turn the small MFD knob to select Magnetic or True and then press ENT.
The Barometric Pressure Setting value will now be highlighted. When True is
selected, a "T" will appear to the right of the heading value on the PFD.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 3-51 Altitude and Vertical Speed MFD Display Units
Figure 3-53 Barometric Setting System Display Units
3-38
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
3) Turn the small MFD knob to select the Barometric Setting units and then press
ENT. The Temperature value will now be highlighted.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 3-54 Temperature System Display Units
Sirius XM Satellite Radio XM Information
(Optional)
Sec 5
Additional
Features
The Aux mode XM Information page displays information about the Sirius
XM Satellite radios, service, and products when the GDL 69/69A is installed and
the Sirius XM Satellite Radio service is activated.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
3.2.2
Sec 3
MFD
4) Turn the small MFD knob to select the Temperature units and then press ENT.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
Figure 3-55 XM Information
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-39
Sirius XM Satellite Radio XM Entertainment
Radio (Optional)
Audio entertainment is available through the Sirius XM Satellite Radio Service
when activated in the optional installation of the GDL 69A. The GDU 620 serves
as the display and control head for your remotely mounted GDL 69A. Sirius XM
Satellite Radio allows you to enjoy a variety of radio programming over long
distances without having to constantly search for new stations. Based on signal
from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions. When enabled,
the Sirius XM Satellite Radio audio entertainment is accessible in Aux Mode.
The information on the Sirius XM Satellite Radio display is composed of
four areas: the Active Channel, Available Channels, Category of the highlighted
Channel, and the Volume setting. The Active Channel window shows the
Channel Name and Number, Artist, Song Title, and Category.
1) Turn the large MFD knob to the AUX page group.
2) Turn the small MFD knob to the XM Radio page.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3.2.3
Figure 3-56 XM Entertainment Radio
A description of XM Entertainment Radio is provided in Section 5 - Additional
Features.
3-40
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
3.2.4
System Status
Foreword
Sec 1
System
The System Status Page displays the statuses, serial numbers, and software
version numbers for all detected system LRUs. Pertinent information on all
system databases is also displayed. Active LRUs are indicated by green check
marks; failed LRUs by red “X’s.” Failed LRUs should be noted and a service
center or Garmin-authorized dealer informed. Database SYNC allows a database
to be synchronized with more than two LRUs (G500/600 and GTNs) at once.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
Figure 3-57 LRU and Database Information
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-41
2) Turn the small MFD knob to the System Status page.
3) Press the LRU soft key to highlight the first item in the LRU Info window.
4) Turn the small MFD knob to scroll through the items in the LRU Info window
in case more items are available than are displayed. If more items are available
than can be displayed in the window, a scroll bar will show on the right side of
the window.
5) Press the DB ACTV soft key to display the active databases.
6) Press the DB SYNC soft key to display the status of Database SYNC operations.
The synchronization happens automatically regardless of whether the soft key
is used.
3.2.4.1
Database Sync Operation
Database SYNC allows the G500/600 to synchronize databases from a
single unit. The pilot only needs to update a single database card and the new
databases are automatically SYNC’d through the units connected in the cockpit
and configured for Database Syncing.
The following databases can be synchronized between using Database SYNC:
• Navigation
• Obstacle
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
1) Turn the large MFD knob to the AUX page group.
• SafeTaxi
Sec 7
Symbols
• Airport Directory
• Chartview (when support is added by Jeppesen)
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
• FliteCharts
• Basemap
When Database SYNC is enabled in the LRUs and a database card is inserted
that is created for Database SYNC, the G500/600 will coordinate with the other
LRUs in the cockpit to determine which unit has the newest databases. Once
the determination has occurred, the connected LRUs will begin to transfer the
databases. This process may take several minutes. The status of the database
transfers to a unit can be viewed in the System Status function on the DB SYNC
page. The G500/600 will display the source of the received databases. If a
database transfer is pending, completed, or not authorized, the status will also
be indicated.
3-42
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
Sec 1
System
When the transfer is complete, if there are new and current databases to
be used, and if the aircraft is stopped and has yet to take-off, the pilot will
be prompted with the option to restart the unit that has the new databases
transferred to it. During the restart process, the unit may prompt you to update
(transfer from the card to the unit’s memory) to the newer databases so they can
be used. Only the aviation database will require a prompt, all the others will
switch during a restart without a prompt.
NOTE: This feature is available in SW Versions 7.00, and later.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
3. On the System Status page, press the DB SYNC soft key to
view the transfer process.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2. Turn the G500/600 on. The Database SYNC will occur
automatically in the background. During the Database SYNC
process, normal operation of the G500/600 is not affected.
Sec 3
MFD
1. With the G500/600 turned off, insert the database card.
Sec 2
PFD
NOTE: Restarting the G500/600 must only be performed when the aircraft
is on the ground as navigation and communication from the restarted unit
will be lost for a period of time.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
Figure 3-58 One Database Transfer In Process and One Pending
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-43
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 3-59 Database Transfer Complete
Figure 3-60 Database Transfer Not Authorized and DB Sync Conflict
3-44
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
Sec 1
System
4. Once all of the database transfers have completed, if the
G500/600 determines that at least one of the newly transferred
databases is effective and the aircraft is on the ground and
stopped prior to a flight, a pop-up and confirmation will be
presented to restart the unit. No pop-up will appear if the
aircraft is moving or has been in the air since the unit was
turned on.
5. Press the Restart soft key to continue updating the database.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-61 System Restart - Step 1
Sec 8
Glossary
WARNING: The unit will reset and all GPS navigation and moving map
functions may be lost while the unit regains GPS position.
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-45
Resolving Database Conflicts
If the G500H determines that there are multiple LRUs with the newest cycle
of a database, but they have different regions or types of that database (i.e.;
Fixed-wing vs. Rotorcraft navigation database, different regions of the navigation
database, or different obstacle database types) then a database conflict will
occur. When a database conflict occurs, that database will not be SYNC’d until
the pilot resolves the conflict. Initiate the resolve conflicts function on the unit
that contains the databases which the pilot wishes to use. These databases will
then be sent to other units.
1. Press the DB SYNC soft key, and then select the Resolve
Conflicts function on the LRU with the desired databases.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3.2.4.2
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Figure 3-62 Database Conflicts
3-46
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
2. Select YES to continue and push the database to all other
LRUs.
Sec 1
System
Figure 3-63 Confirm Database Sync
Sec 2
PFD
3. Once sync’d, the desired database will be SYNC’d to the other
LRUs and “Initiating” will be displayed on the Sync Conflicts
window.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 3-64 Database Conflicts Resolved (Initiating)
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-47
ADS-B/FIS-B Status (optional)
When the optional GDL88 is installed, the ADS-B/FIS-B Status page will
show the status of satellite communications, FIS-B weather products, and the
traffic applications.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3.2.5
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 3-65 ADS-B/FIS-B Status Page
3-48
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
3.2.6
External Video (optional)
External Video is an optional function that displays video provided by an
externally mounted video source on the aircraft.
1) Turn the large MFD knob to the Aux page group.
Foreword
2) The External Video page is the first page in the Aux page group.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Display of External Video Source
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Current Zoom Level
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Current Setup Values For
The Selected Video Source
Sec 7
Symbols
Video Source Selections
Video Source Setup
Full Screen Mode
Figure 3-66 External Video
Select Video Source
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-49
Appendix B
Index
2) Touch the Video 2 soft key to select Video 2 source for viewing and setup.
Appendix A
If more than one video source is available, the Video 1 and Video 2 soft keys
will be available at the bottom of the display.
1) Touch the Video 1 soft key to select Video 1 source for viewing and setup.
Sec 8
Glossary
3.2.6.1
Foreword
Sec 1
System
3.2.6.2
Zoom
1) While viewing the External Video function, press the Up Rng Arrow key to
increase the zoom up to 10x magnification. Zoom level is made through digital
magnification.
2) Press the Down Rng Arrow key to decrease the zoom level down to a
minimum of 1x.
Sec 2
PFD
2) Turn the small MFD knob clockwise to pan up (the map will move down).
3) Turn the small MFD knob counterclockwise to pan down (the map will move
up).
4) Turn the large MFD knob clockwise to pan to the right (the map will move left).
5) Turn the large MFD knob counterclockwise to pan to the left (the map will
move right).
6) Press the small MFD knob to exit panning.
3.2.6.4
Setup
The display of each video source is set up individually.
1) While viewing the External Video page, press the soft key for the desired Video
source (Video 1 or Video 2).
2) Press the Setup soft key.
3) The Current value for Brightness will be selected. Use the following directions
for each value.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
3.2.6.3
Panning
1) While viewing the External Video function, press the small MFD knob to
activate panning.
Sec 3
MFD
3) Pressing the FULL soft key toggles between a half and full page view.
Figure 3-67 External Video Setup
4) After selecting the desired settings, press the small MFD knob or the Setup
soft key to exit editing.
3-50
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 1
System
2) The Current value for Brightness will be selected. Turn the small MFD knob to
adjust the Brightness value.
Foreword
Brightness Adjustment
1) While viewing the External Video page and the desired Video source, press the
Setup soft key.
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 3-68 External Video Brightness Adjustment
Sec 3
MFD
Contrast Adjustment
1) While viewing the External Video page and the desired Video source, press the
Setup soft key.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2) The Current value for Brightness will be selected. Turn the large MFD knob to
highlight the Contrast value. Turn the small MFD knob to adjust the Contrast
value.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
3) After selecting the desired setting, turn the large MFD knob to highlight the
next value or press the small MFD knob to exit editing.
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-69 External Video Contrast Adjustment
3) After selecting the desired setting, turn the large MFD knob to highlight the
next value or press the small MFD knob to exit editing.
Sec 8
Glossary
Saturation Adjustment
1) While viewing the External Video page and the desired Video source, press the
Setup soft key.
Appendix A
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-51
Appendix B
Index
2) The Current value for Brightness will be selected. Turn the large MFD knob
to highlight the Saturation value. Turn the small MFD knob to adjust the
Saturation value.
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
3) After selecting the desired setting, press the small MFD knob to exit editing.
3.2.6.5
Restore Defaults
The Restore Defaults selection will return the Brightness, Contrast, and
Saturation values to their original settings.
1) While viewing the External Video page, press the MENU key.
Figure 3-71 Restore Video Defaults Menu Selection
2) "Restore Defaults" will be highlighted. Press the ENT key.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 3-70 External Video Saturation Adjustment
3-52
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
1) While viewing the External Video page, press the FULL key.
Foreword
3.2.6.6
Full Screen
The Full selection allows selection of the part of the video information for
display.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Selected Display Area
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Window of the
Selected Display Area
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Full Screen Mode
Figure 3-72 Full Video Selection
2) Press the small MFD knob to activate the selection window.
Sec 7
Symbols
3) Turn the large MFD key to move the selection window.
Sec 8
Glossary
4) Press the small MFD knob to accept the selected display area shown in the
window.
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-53
Foreword
3.2.7
Position Reporting (optional)
Position Reporting is a system which collects system variables and transmits
them over the Iridium® Satellite Network at a given interval through the GSR 56.
NOTE: The GSR 56 does not report its serial number until 90 seconds after
power up of the GDU. As a result, for that period, the product info for the
GSR 56 will show "Waiting."
Time Until Transmit
The Time Until Transmit field is a countdown timer that shows the time until
the next data transmission. This field is blank when the aircraft is on the ground.
Countdown Time Until Transmit
Figure 3-73 Position Reporting Time Until Transmit
Position Reporting Status
Position Reporting will be enabled when the aircraft is in the air.
Status
Idle
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Status
The Status window shows the time until the next data transmission and the
status of the reporting system.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
3.2.7.1
Sec 8
Glossary
Initializing
Transferring
Unavailable
Description
The reporting system is not using the GSR 56 for reporting at
this time.
The GSR 56 and its driver are currently initializing.
A position report is currently being transmitted.
The GSR 56 is currently not usable by the reporting system.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Table 3-6 Position Reporting Status
3.2.7.2
Report Type
Standard
When the Standard reporting type is used, the Position Reporting Period may
be set to Off or intervals of 2 to 60 minutes. The Automatic Position Reporting
Period can be set to Off or periods of 2 minutes.
3-54
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
2) Press the small MFD knob to select the Report Type.
Foreword
1) Turn the large MFD knob to reach the Aux page group. Turn the small MFD
knob to reach the Position Reporting page.
3) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight Standard and then press the ENT key.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 3-74 Select Standard Reporting
4) The Position Reporting Period type will now be selected. Turn the small MFD
knob to highlight "Off" or "Automatic" and then press the ENT key. The
Position Reporting Period interval will now be selected.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
5) Turn the small MFD knob to select the reporting frequency.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-75 Select Standard Reporting Period Frequency
Sec 8
Glossary
6) Press the small MFD knob to exit editing.
SEND Soft Key Label
Appendix B
Index
SEND Soft Key
Figure 3-76 Press SEND to Override the Reporting Period
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Appendix A
7) With the Standard Reporting Type, the reporting period may be manually
overridden by pressing the SEND soft key to send data.
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-55
The G500H system, when combined with a GSR 56 Iridium datalink, can
send position reports that contain data as required by the U.S. Government
Automated Flight Following system. The GSR 56 account will allow configuration
to forward data to the Automated Flight Following system.
1) While viewing the Position Reporting function, press the small MFD knob to
select the Report Type.
2) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight "AFF" and then press the ENT.
Figure 3-77 Select Automatic Flight Following (AFF) Reporting Type
3) Turn the small MFD knob to select "OFF" or the default "Every 2 Min" value.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Automatic Flight Following (AFF)
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Figure 3-78 Select AFF Reporting Period Frequency
3-56
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
3.2.8
Iridium Phone Operation (Optional)
3.2.8.1
Sec 1
System
CAUTION: When interfaced with a GSR 56 Iridium transceiver only one
SD card may be present in the GDU620 and it must be in the lower slot.
Foreword
Optional satellite telephone operation is available through the Iridium®
satellite system that is interfaced through the Garmin GSR 56.
Status
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Table 3-7 Iridium Phone Status
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Description
The Iridium phone is not using the GSR 56 for communicating
at this time.
Initializing
The GSR 56 and its driver are currently initializing.
Connected
The GSR 56 is connected to the called number.
Connecting Call The GSR 56 is in the process of connecting to the called
number.
Changing Volume The volume level on the GSR 56 is changing.
Busy
The phone is in use by another service and the call may not be
made.
Dialing
The GSR 56 is dialing the called number.
Incoming Call A call is being made to the GSR 56.
Hanging Up
The GSR 56 is disconnecting from the current call.
Unavailable
The GSR 56 is currently not usable by the Iridium phone system.
Sec 3
MFD
Status
Idle
Sec 2
PFD
The Status section shows the Call Time, Phone Status, and Call Suppression
selected. The Call Time value shows the length of the call time for the current
call using the Iridium phone. Phone Status shows the current operating status
of the Iridium phone.
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-57
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2) Press the small MFD knob to select the Call Suppression type.
Status
Off
Description
Call Suppression is turned off. Calls may be transmitted and
received through the Iridium phone.
On
Call Suppression is turned on. The incoming call pop-up will not
be shown. The call may still be answered on the phone page.
Outgoing calls are not affected.
On During APR/ Call Suppression is turned on during Approach, Missed Approach,
MAPR/TERM and Terminal operations. The incoming call pop-up will not
be shown. The call may still be answered on the phone page.
Outgoing calls are not affected.
Table 3-8 Call Suppression
3) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired selection.
Figure 3-79 Select Call Suppression
4) Press the ENT key. Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the selection
cursor.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Call Suppression controls calling when use of the Iridium phone system is
allowed.
1) Turn the large MFD knob to reach the Aux page group. Turn the small MFD
knob to reach the Iridium Phone page.
3-58
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
3.2.8.2
Managing the Phone Book
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
3) If items already exist in the catalog, turn the large MFD knob to select the
Phone Book Catalog icon. Then, turn the small MFD knob to display the
contents of the Phone Book Catalog and highlight the New Entry selection and
press ENT.
Sec 2
PFD
2) Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor and then turn the large MFD
knob to highlight the Name item in the Phone Book. The Name field will blink.
Sec 1
System
Creating Phone Number Names
1) Turn the large MFD knob to reach the Aux page group. Turn the small MFD
knob to reach the Iridium Phone page.
Foreword
The Phone Book is stored on the SD card in the bottom slot. The Phone Book
will only be available for use when the SD card is in the bottom slot. The Phone
Book may hold up to 128 entries. A phone number may be entered and dialed
without saving it to the Phone Book. Note that it is necessary to dial a “1,” the
area code, and then the number.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
"New Entry" Selected for
Phone Book Catalog Entry
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 3-80 "New Entry" Selected for Phone Book Catalog Entry
Sec 7
Symbols
4) Turn the small MFD knob to select the first character of the name and then turn
the large MFD knob to select the next character. When the name is complete,
press the ENT key.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix B
Index
Figure 3-81 Phone Book Name Entry
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Appendix A
Phone Book
Catalog
Entry Name
3-59
Foreword
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Creating Phone Numbers with the Rotary Knobs
1) Turn the large MFD knob to the Phone Number field. Turn the small MFD knob
to select the first character of the number and then turn the large MFD knob
to select the next character. When the number is complete, press the ENT key.
Phone Book
Catalog
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Entry Number
Figure 3-82 Phone Book Number Entry
2) Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the selection cursor.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Press To Use Keys
For Number Entry
3-60
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 1
System
Press To Use Keys
For Number Entry
Foreword
Creating Phone Numbers with Soft Keys
1) Numbers may also be entered using the soft keys at the bottom of the display.
Press the Keys key at the bottom of the display.
Figure 3-83 Phone Book Number Entry Using Hot Keys
2) Press the key for the group of desired numbers.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Press for
Press for
Press for
numbers 1, numbers 5, numbers 9 and
2, 3, and 4 6, 7, and 8 0, and symbols
* and #
3) Press the key for the desired number. Repeat as necessary and then press ENT
when the number is complete.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Press Keys For
Number Entry
Figure 3-85 Selecting Individual Numbers for Phone Book Number Entry
1) Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor and then turn the large MFD
knob to select the Phone Book Catalog icon.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Selecting a Phone Book Catalog Entry
Sec 7
Symbols
Phone Book icon.
When Highlighted,
turn small MFD
knob to view list.
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 3-86 Selecting the Phone Book Catalog
Appendix A
2) Turn the small MFD knob to display the contents of the Phone Book Catalog
and highlight the desired entry.
Appendix B
Index
Selected Phone
Book Catalog Entry
Figure 3-87 Selected Phone Book Catalog Entry
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 3-84 Selecting Numeric Groups for Phone Book Number Entry
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-61
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix B
Index
3) Press the ENT key. Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the selection
cursor.
Deleting a Phone Book Catalog Entry
1) Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor and then turn the large MFD
knob to select the Phone Book Catalog icon.
2) Turn the small MFD knob to display the contents of the Phone Book Catalog
and highlight the desired entry. Press ENT to select the catalog entry.
3) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the DELETE key. Press ENT to delete the
catalog entry. Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the selection cursor.
Editing a Phone Book Catalog Entry
1) Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor and then turn the large MFD
knob to select the Phone Book Catalog icon.
2) Turn the small MFD knob to display the contents of the Phone Book Catalog
and highlight the desired entry. Press ENT to select the catalog entry.
3) Use the large MFD and small MFD knobs to make changes to the name or
number. Press ENT to save the changes. Press the small MFD knob again to
cancel the selection cursor.
3.2.8.3
Phone Volume
Use the Phone Volume controls to adjust the loudness of the phone calls
you hear. Volume controls will only be available when the Idle, Connected, or
Changing Volume states are displayed.
Adjusting the Phone Volume with the Rotary Knobs
1) While viewing the Iridium Phone page, press the small MFD knob and then
turn the large MFD knob to select the Volume control. The volume bar graph
will blink when selected.
2) Turn the small MFD knob to set the desired volume level.
3) Press the ENT key. Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the selection
cursor.
3-62
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Press to Dial
Selected
Number
Press to Select
Volume Keys
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 3-88 Select Soft Keys for Phone Volume Adjustment
Sec 1
System
Phone Volume
Level Bar Graph
Foreword
Adjusting the Phone Volume with the Soft Keys
1) While viewing the Iridium Phone page, press the VOL key at the bottom of the
display.
2) Press the + or – keys as necessary to adjust the phone volume.
Sec 3
MFD
Press to
Attenuate
or Mute
Press to
Decrease
Phone Volume
Press to
Increase Phone
Volume
Press to Show
Previous List of
Soft Keys
3) Pressing the ATT soft key will attenuate the volume. Press the ATT soft key
again to return to the previous volume.
Sec 8
Glossary
3) After completing the call, press the HANG UP key.
Sec 7
Symbols
2) Press the DIAL key.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
3.2.8.4
Making a Phone Call
1) While viewing the Iridium Phone page, enter a phone number or select one
from the Phone Book catalog.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 3-89 Using Soft Keys for Phone Volume Adjustment
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Press to Dial
Selected
Number
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-63
Answering a Phone Call
An incoming phone call will generate a pop-up announcing the call. When
a call is accepted, the pop-up will show that the call is connected and the
cumulative call time will be shown.
1. When an incoming call is available, press the ENT key or the ANSWER soft
key to answer the call. Or, press the CLR key or the HANG UP soft key to not
answer the call and hang up.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3.2.8.5
2. After a called is accepted and connected, the connection time will be shown
on the pop-up. Press the ATT soft key to attenuate the call volume; pressing
it again will return to normal volume. Press the HANG UP soft key to end the
call. Press the VOL - or VOL + keys to adjust the call volume.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 3-90 Incoming Call Pop-Up
Figure 3-91 Connected Call Pop-Up
3-64
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
3.3
Flight Plan Pages
Use the Flight Plan page group to view details about your flight plan route.
The Flight Plan Function shows the Current Flight Plan that is active in the
navigation source displayed on the CDI.
Foreword
3.3.1
Sec 1
System
Active Flight Plan Page
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Digital Chart
Available
For Waypoint
Sec 3
MFD
DTK, Distance, and ETA
from the Previous Leg
Sec 2
PFD
The Active Flight Plan box shows all of the legs of your flight plan with the
current leg indicated in magenta. Listed are each leg with the Desired Track
(DTK), Distance (DIS), and Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) for the legs. METARs
are shown for waypoints in the flight plan. In the Minimums window, the source
and selected value are shown. See section 2.4.4 on Minimum Descent Altitude
(MDA) or Decision Height (DH) in the PFD section and section 3.5.1.3 for more
detail. In the Active Leg Info box in the lower part of the display, the Course with
beginning and ending waypoints, Active Leg En Route Safe Altitude (ESA), and
Route ESA are shown. METAR information is in the METAR section of Section
4 (Hazard Avoidance).
Graphic METARs
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Current Leg
Flight Plan Legs
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Baro
Minimums
Window
Appendix B
Index
Active Leg
Window
Figure 3-92 Flight Page 1 (Active Flight Plan)
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-65
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
3.3.1.1
Active Flight Plan Detail
The active flight plan is shown on the first page of the Flight Plan page group.
Further information may be available for each waypoint as shown by the INFO
or WX soft keys. The WX soft key will only appear if a data link receiver is
installed and there is a Weather subscription.
1) Press the MFD knob and then use the large and small MFD knobs to highlight
waypoints in the flight plan.
2) Press the INFO soft key, if available, to view information about the highlighted
waypoint.
4) Press the small MFD knob to return to the Active Flight Plan page.
3.3.1.2
Active Flight Plan Options
The Active Flight Plan page provides information for the flight plan currently
in use for navigation.
To change data fields on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) While viewing the Active Flight Plan Page of the FPL page group, press MENU
to display the Active Flight Plan Page Options window.
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight “Change Fields?” and then press ENT.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
3) Press the WX soft key, if available, to view XM weather information about the
highlighted waypoint.
3) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the field you wish to change.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 3-93 Active Flight Plan Page Menu Option Selection
Figure 3-94 Active Flight Plan Page Menu Change Fields Option Selection
3-66
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4) Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired data item and press ENT.
To restore factory default settings for data fields on the Active Flight Plan Page:
2) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight “Restore Defaults?” and then press ENT.
Sec 1
System
1) While viewing the Active Flight Plan Page of the FPL page group, press MENU
to display the Active Flight Plan Page Options window.
Foreword
5) Press the small MFD knob to remove the cursor.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 3-95 Active Flight Plan Page Menu Option Selection to Restore Defaults
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2) With the Minimums Source highlighted, select the Altitude Minimums Alerter
source with small MFD knob.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
3.3.1.3
Setting the Altitude Minimums Alerter
The Altitude Alerting function provides the pilot with visual and aural alerts
(if interfaced to an audio panel) when approaching the Selected Altitude. See
2.4.4 Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting section of the PFD
section for more details.
1) While viewing the Charts Page of the FPL page group, press the Menu key.
With the Set Minimums item highlighted, press ENT.
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-96 Minimums Source Selection
Sec 8
Glossary
3) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Altitude Minimums value. Turn the
large and small MFD knobs to change the Altitude Minimums value.
Appendix A
Figure 3-97 Minimums Altitude Selection
In dual installations, the minimums alerting altitude value may be set from
either GDU 620 and will be synchronized on both units.
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-67
Appendix B
Index
4) Press ENT to activate the selected value.
Foreword
Sec 1
System
3.3.2
Facility Identifier
Facility Name
Facility Location
Facility Type
Bearing & Distance
to Wpt from
Present Position
Map Region
Lat/Lon
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Waypoint Information Page
The Waypoint Information page provides details about a particular waypoint.
You can show a waypoint by selecting it by Ident, Facility Name, or by City.
The Map window shows the selected waypoint in the center of the map. The
Range keys zoom in and out on the map. The Info window at the bottom of
the display shows the Bearing and Distance from your present position to the
selected waypoint as well as its region and Lat/Lon coordinates.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
NOTE: If you highlight the Minimums Altitude field on the FPL page and press the CLR
key, it will turn the minimums functionality off.
Map Window
Wpt Weather
Info Soft Key
Airport Directory Soft Key
Info/Map Soft Key
Rwy/Freq Soft Key
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Map Orientation
Figure 3-98 Flight Plan Waypoint Information Page
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
NOTE: Waypoint information is shown on the second page of the Flight
Plan page group.
3-68
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
3.3.2.1
Selecting a Waypoint
1) While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group, press
the MFD knob and use the large and small MFD knobs to move the cursor to
select the identifier for the waypoint.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 3-99 Waypoint Selection
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2) Press the ENT key to select the waypoint.
OR
Sec 7
Symbols
1) While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group, press the
small MFD knob.
2) Turn the small MFD knob counterclockwise.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
Figure 3-100 Waypoint Category Selection
3) Turn the small MFD knob to show FPL, NRST, or RECENT.
4) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the desired airport, and then press ENT.
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-69
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 3-101 Heliport Waypoint Information Page
OR
1) While viewing the Nav Map 1 or 2 pages of the MAP page group, press the
MFD knob and use the large and small MFD knobs to move the cursor to
highlight the identifier for a waypoint.
Appendix B
Index
Selected
Waypoint
Selection
Cursor
Figure 3-102 Waypoint Selection
2) Press the ENT key to select the waypoint.
3-70
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
3.3.2.2
Waypoint/Runway/Frequency Information Detail
Foreword
Sec 1
System
More detailed information about a selected waypoint is available by pressing
the RWY/FREQ or APT DIR soft keys on the Waypoint Information page.
The current destination waypoint is the default item shown. You may select
a different Ident, Facility, or Location. In the Runway window, you may view
information about the runways. In the Frequency window, a scroll bar is shown
on the right side of the window when more frequencies are available.
Sec 2
PFD
Facility
Information
Window
Sec 3
MFD
Runway
Information
Window
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Airport
Frequency
Window
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-103 Flight Plan Waypoint Info Detail
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-71
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Ident/Facility/City Selection
The current destination Identifier, Facility Type with icon, Facility Name, and
City (location) are shown in the top window of the Flight Plan mode Waypoint
Information page. The default is the Nearest airport if there is no active flight plan.
New Identifiers may also be selected as shown in section 3.5.3.3.
Access (Public/
Private and
Symbol)
Identifier
Facility Name
City
1) While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group, press
the RWY/FREQ, APT DIR, or WX soft keys to view information about the
waypoint.
2) The current destination Ident, Facility, and City is shown, but may be changed
to find information about other choices. Press the small MFD knob to activate
the cursor. These fields may not be selected if the RWY, APT DIR, or WX pages
are selected. If viewing those pages, press the soft key for that page again to
return to the Waypoint Information page.
3) Use the large MFD knob to highlight the field you wish to change and use the
small MFD knob to change the value.
4) Press the ENT key to save the selected value or press the small MFD knob to
cancel editing.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 3-104 Flight Plan Ident/Facility/City Detail
3-72
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 1
System
Arrow Indicates
More Runways
Runway Surface
Sec 2
PFD
Runway Number
Runway Length
& Width
Pilot-Controlled
Lighting Frequency
Foreword
Runway Information Selection
Information is provided for each runway showing the following detail:
runway number, runway length, surface type, and the frequency for PilotControlled Lighting (PCL).
Figure 3-105 Waypoint Runway Information
3) Press the small MFD knob to cancel editing.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The Frequency window at the bottom of the Waypoint Information page
shows the frequencies available for the selected waypoint. A scroll bar is shown
on the right side of the Frequency window if more frequencies are available.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Facility Frequency Selection
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2) Use the large MFD knob to highlight the Runway and use the small MFD knob
to display the available runways.
Sec 3
MFD
1) While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group, press the
RWY/FREQ soft key to view information about the waypoint and press the
small MFD knob to activate the cursor.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 3-106 Waypoint Frequency Information
1) While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group, press the
RWY/FREQ soft key to view information about the waypoint and then press
the small MFD knob to activate the cursor.
Appendix A
2) Turn the small MFD knob to scroll through the available frequencies.
Appendix B
Index
3) Press the small MFD knob to exit.
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-73
The Airport Directory lists extensive information about the selected airport
and the surrounding area. The RWY/FREQ and APT DIR soft keys are greyed
out and not functional unless the selected waypoint is an airport or heliport.
NOTE: Airport Directory information comes from a database provided by
various 3rd parties. Refer to the Database information in the AUX – SYSTEM
STATUS page for details on the installed Airport Directory database.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Foreword
Airport Directory
Sec 1
System
3.3.2.3
Figure 3-107 Airport Directory Information
1) While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group, press the
APT DIR soft key to view more information about the waypoint.
2) Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor.
3) Use the small or large MFD knob to scroll through the information.
4) Press the small MFD knob to deactivate the cursor. Press the APT DIR soft key
again to return to the Waypoint Information page.
3-74
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
3.3.2.4
Waypoint Weather Information (Optional)
Foreword
Sec 1
System
The Weather information function is available if a data link receiver is
installed and weather information is available for the selected waypoint. METAR
and TAF text are displayed on the Waypoint Weather Information Page. Pressing
the WX/NOTAM soft key will show the weather information page. Highlighting
the Product selection and turning the small MFD knob will display METAR
data, TAF information, and NOTAMs as they are available. NOTAMs are also
available when FIS-B is available.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 3-108 Waypoint Weather Information (Textual METARs and TAFs)
Appendix A
3) Press the small MFD knob to return to the main Flight Plan page.
Sec 8
Glossary
2) Use the small MFD knob or the large MFD knob to scroll through the available
information.
Sec 7
Symbols
1) While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group, press the
WX soft key to view weather information for the waypoint.
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-75
Charts Page (Optional)
When the Chart function is available, charts will be shown on the third page
of the Flight Plan page group.
See Section 5.1 for more information.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3.3.3
3-76
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Sec 1
System
Terrain Avoidance
Foreword
The G500H hazard avoidance features are designed to provide advisory
information of potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain,
and air traffic.
This section is divided into the following groups:
• Terrain Proximity
Sec 2
PFD
• Garmin Terrain-HSVT™ (Optional)
Traffic Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
• Traffic Advisory System (Optional)
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• Traffic Information Service (TIS)
(Optional - GTX 33/330 Transponder required)
• ADS-B (Optional - GDL 88H required)
Weather
• GFDS Weather with the Iridium® satellite system through GSR 56 (Optional)
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• FIS-B Weather with the GDL 88H (Optional)
®
• Stormscope (Optional)
4.1
Terrain Configurations
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-1
Appendix B
Index
• Terrain-Proximity - Refers to the display of the relative terrain elevations
on the moving map. No aural alerts of any type are provided by a TerrainProximity configuration.
Appendix A
NOTE: Terrain-HSVT is not a fully functional HSVT and does not meet the
TAWS TSO-C194 requirements.
Sec 8
Glossary
• Terrain-HSVT - Refers to a subset of H-TAWS that meets the terrain alerting
requirements outlined in Section 7.b of AC 23-26. Terrain-HSVT is a subset
of H-TAWS that provides a FLTA functionality, including visual alerting
and aural alerting. Terrain-HSVT is provided with the Synthetic Vision
functionality and not marketed separately.
Sec 7
Symbols
Garmin provides the following terrain awareness and alerting solutions
within the G500H environment:
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 5
Additional
Features
®
• GDL 69/69A XM Satellite Weather (Optional)
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix B
Index
Terrain
Configuration
PFD
Annunciator
Text
Terrain Proximity
Terrain Proximity
w/ GNS/GTN
HTAWS
Terrain Proximity
w/3rd-party
HTAWS
Terrain-HSVT
-
Terrain-HSVT w/
GNS/GTN HTAWS
Terrain-SVT
w/3rd-party
HTAWS
G500/600
HTAWS
Alert Source
HSVT
MFD
Terrain/
Terrain/
Obstacle
Obstacle
Shading
Alerts
-
Aural
Callouts
-
GNS/GTN
HTAWS
-
-
GNS/GTN
HTAWS
-
-
-
3rd-party
HTAWS
G500/600
G500/600*
G500/600
G500/600
GNS/GTN
HTAWS**
G500/600*/
GTN***
G500/600/
GTN***
GNS/GTN
HTAWS**
3rd-party
TAWS
G500/600
G500/600*
G500/600
G500/600
Table 4-1 G500H Terrain Annunciations
* HSVT Terrain/Obstacle shading is only available when HSVT is enabled
and displayed.
** If the Garmin GPS/TAWS is not available, the G500/600 Terrain-HSVT
will generate PFD annunciator text and aural callouts. An advisory message will
indicate when reversion to Terrain-HSVT alerting has occurred.
*** GTN v5.10 and later with GDU v7.00 and later.
GNS/GTN HTAWS may be provided by a GNS 500WT-series or GTN-series
navigator with HTAWS. The GNS/GTN HTAWS must be interfaced to the
G500/600 as GPS 1.
Each of the terrain awareness configurations are detailed in the following
sub-sections.
4-2
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.2
Terrain Scale
Foreword
The Terrain Scale option in the Map page group selects whether the Terrain
Scale is shown on the Navigation Map. The Terrain scale is located on the right
side of the display.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Color
Green
Yellow
Red
Terrain is more than 500 ft below the aircraft.
Terrain is between 250 ft below and 500 ft below the aircraft.
Terrain is between 250 ft below and 0 ft above the aircraft.
Terrain is between 0 ft above and 250 ft above the aircraft.
Terrain is more than 250 ft above the aircraft.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Orange
Description
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Black
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 4-1 Terrain Scale
Table 4-2 Terrain Scale Color Codes
Terrain Proximity
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-3
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Appendix A
Terrain Proximity utilizes terrain and obstacle databases that are referenced
Sec 8
Glossary
Terrain Proximity uses information provided from the GPS receiver to
provide a horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite
measurements. GPS altitude is converted to a Mean Sea Level (MSL)-based
altitude (GPS-MSL altitude). GPS-MSL altitude accuracy is affected by factors
such as satellite geometry, but it is not subject to variations in pressure and
temperature that normally affect pressure altitude devices. GPS-MSL altitude
does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. Therefore,
GPS altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to
calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.
Sec 7
Symbols
Garmin Terrain Proximity is a non-TSO-C194-certified terrain awareness
system provided as a standard feature of GDU 620 to increase situational
awareness and help reduce controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Terrain may be
displayed on the Map page group Navigation Map and Terrain pages.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
4.3
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Terrain-Proximity - is a non-TSO-C194 certified terrain awareness system. Do
not confuse Terrain Proximity with H-TAWS. H-TAWS is TSO-C194 certified and
Terrain Proximity is not. Terrain Proximity does not provide warning annunciations
or voice alerts, it only provides color indications on map displays when terrain and
obstacles are within a certain altitude threshold from the aircraft.
Terrain-HSVT is a non-TSO-C194 certified terrain awareness system. Do
not confuse Terrain-HSVT with H-TAWS. H-TAWS is TSO-C194 certified
and Terrain-HSVT is not. Terrain-HSVT provides terrain alerting functionality,
including visual alerting and aural alerting. Terrain-HSVT is provided with the
Synthetic Vision functionality and not marketed separately. Garmin TerrainHSVT is available in GDU 620 v4.00 or later, when configured for Rotary Wing
and Synthetic Vision enabled.
Terrain Proximity requires the following to operate properly:
• The system must have a valid 3-D GPS position solution.
• The system must have a valid terrain/obstacle database.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
to mean sea level (MSL). Using the GPS position and GPS-MSL altitude, Terrain
Proximity displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative
to the position and altitude of the aircraft. In this manner, Terrain Proximity
provides awareness of surrounding terrain conditions.
4-4
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.3.1
Displaying Terrain Proximity
Sec 1
System
4.3.1.1
Terrain Proximity Page Display on the Terrain Page
1) Turn the large MFD knob to the MAP page group.
2) Turn the small MFD knob to the Terrain page.
Sec 2
PFD
3) Press the VIEW soft key to show the 360 and ARC soft keys.
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 4-2 Terrain Page with VIEW Soft Key to reach 360° and 120° Arc Soft Keys
Map Orientation
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Altitude
Information
North Indication
Foreword
The Terrain Proximity page is in the Map page group. Terrain is also selectable
on the Navigation Map pages.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Arc View
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Terrain
Altitude
Legend
Page Name
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Ownship Symbol
at Present Position
Appendix A
Press View to Display the Arc and 360°
Range Ring Selections
Figure 4-3 Terrain Page with Aviation Data Displayed and 360° View
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-5
Foreword
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Terrain Overlay
Terrain Data Icon
Figure 4-4 Terrain on Navigation Map Page
4.3.1.2
Terrain Proximity Page Display on a Navigation Map Page
1) Turn the large MFD knob to the MAP page group.
2) On Navigation Map page 1 or 2, press the MAP soft key to show the TERRAIN
soft key.
3) Press the TERRAIN soft key to overlay terrain on the Navigation Map.
NOTE: Terrain Proximity and NEXRAD are mutually exclusive on the map
page.
4.3.1.3
Terrain Proximity Page 120° Arc or 360° Rings
Select the 120º Arc or 360º rings overlay for the Terrain page with either the
360/Arc soft keys or from the Page Menu.
1) Press the VIEW soft key to show the 360 and ARC soft keys.
2) Press the 360 or Arc soft key.
OR
Press MENU and the with the View Arc or View 360° selection highlighted
press ENT.
4-6
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Figure 4-5 Terrain Page Menu Viewing Selections
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-6 Terrain Page with 360° Rings
Figure 4-7 Terrain Page with 120° Arc
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-7
Foreword
1) While viewing the Terrain page of the MAP page group, press MENU for Map
selections to hide or show aviation data overlay on the Terrain page.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
4.3.1.4
Terrain Proximity Page Aviation Data
The Page Menu selections allow you to hide or show aviation data overlay on
the Terrain page.
2) Press ENT to save the highlighted value.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 4-8 Show/Hide Aviation Data on the Terrain Page
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Terrain Overlay
Sec 8
Glossary
Terrain Data Icon
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Figure 4-9 Navigation Map Page with Terrain Data Displayed
4-8
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.3.2
Terrain Proximity Limitations
Sec 5
Additional
Features
System Status
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The Terrain system continually monitors several system-critical items, such
as database validity, hardware status, and GPS status. Should the system detect a
failure, a failure message will be displayed.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
4.3.3
Sec 3
MFD
WARNING: The data contained in the TERRAIN databases comes from
government agencies. Garmin accurately processes and cross-validates the
data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
Sec 2
PFD
Terrain uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government
sources. The displayed information should never be understood as being allinclusive.
Sec 1
System
Terrain information is based on terrain elevation information in a database
that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain information should be used as an aid
to situational awareness. Never use it for navigation or to maneuver to avoid
terrain.
Foreword
Terrain Proximity displays terrain and obstructions relative to the altitude of
the aircraft. Individual obstructions may be shown if available in the database.
However, all obstructions may not be available in the database and data may be
inaccurate. Never use this information for navigation or to maneuver to avoid
obstacles.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-9
External H-TAWS
If an external 400W/500W-series H-TAWS unit is installed and interfaced to
the G500H, the alerts generated by the external unit will be displayed on the
PFD. Refer to the 400W/500W-series Garmin Optional Displays Pilot’s Guide
Addendum (p/n 190-00356-30) for more information regarding these alerts.
The HTAWS is an alerting system. The system does NOT guarantee
successful recovery from a conflict due to factors such as pilot response, aircraft
performance, and database limitations. No standardized recovery technique is
defined as recovery maneuvers may vary. The HTAWS shall NOT be used for
navigation purposes.
H-TAWS annunciations received from the GNS 400W/500W Series H-TAWS
unit will be displayed to the left and aligned with the top of the Altitude Tape on
the G500H PFD. A new annunciation will flash for approximately five seconds.
• HTAWS annunciations can only be received from the #1 GNS unit if
multiple GNS units are installed.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.4
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• If the #1 GNS unit is powered OFF the G500H will revert to Terrain
HSVT alerting if equipped with synthetic vision.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• For External TAWS (HSDB), terrain impact points on the MFD are
generated from the data crossfilled from the GTN.
Figure 4-11 H-TAWS Annunciations from a 400W/500W-series Unit
Appendix B
Index
NOTE: H-TAWS Caution Alerts are displayed as black text on a yellow
background; H-TAWS Warning Alerts are displayed as white text on a red
background.
4-10
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.5
Garmin Terrain-HSVT™ (Optional)
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Garmin Terrain-HSVT™ refers to a subset of H-TAWS that meets the terrain
alerting requirements outlined in Section 7.b of AC 23-26. Terrain-HSVT is
a subset of H-TAWS that provides a FLTA functionality with visual alerting
and aural alerting. Terrain-HSVT is provided with Garmin Synthetic Vision
Technology (SVT™) functionality and not provided separately.
Terrain-HSVT alerting consists of the following alert types:
• Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) / Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI)
Alerting
2)
Helicopter Obstacle Database
3)
Aviation Database including Heliports
Sec 8
Glossary
6 arc-second Terrain Databases
Sec 7
Symbols
1)
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
To function properly Terrain-HSVT requires the use of databases specific to
helicopters and Terrain-HSVT. The databases required are:
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Terrain-HSVT utilizes terrain and obstacle databases that are referenced to
mean sea level (MSL). Using the GPS position and GPS-MSL altitude, TerrainHSVT displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to
the position and altitude of the aircraft. The GPS position and GPS-MSL altitude
are used to calculate and “predict” the aircraft’s flight path in relation to the
surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this manner, Terrain-HSVT can provide
advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions. Detailed alert modes
are described later in this section.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Terrain-HSVT is available in G500H GDU 620 SW version 4.00, and later.
Sec 3
MFD
• Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) / Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
Alerting
Sec 2
PFD
• Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) Alerting which consists of:
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-11
Garmin Terrain-HSVT™ Page 120° Arc or 360°
Rings
Select the 120º Arc or 360º rings overlay for the Terrain page with either the
360/Arc soft keys or from the Page Menu.
Figure 4-12 Terrain-HSVT 360 and Arc Views
1. Press the VIEW soft key and then the 360 or Arc soft key.
OR
2. Press MENU and the with the "View Arc" or "View 360°" selection highlighted
press ENT.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.5.1
Appendix B
Index
Figure 4-13 Terrain-SVT Page Menu Viewing Selections
4-12
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.5.2
Garmin Terrain-HSVT™ Page Aviation Data
Foreword
Select the display of Aviation data on the Garmin Terrain-HSVT page. The
Page Menu selections allow you to hide or show aviation data overlay on the
Terrain or the Map Setup options for the Navigation Map pages.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-14 Terrain-HSVT Hide and Show Aviation Data
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
1) While viewing the Terrain page of the MAP page group, press MENU for Map
selections to hide or show aviation data overlay on the Terrain or the Map
Setup options for the Navigation Map pages.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Figure 4-15 Show/Hide Aviation Data on the Terrain-HSVT Page
2) Press ENT to save the highlighted value.
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-13
Inhibiting/Enabling Garmin Terrain-HSVT™
Alerting
Terrain-HSVT has an inhibit mode that deactivates the aural and visual alerts.
Pilots should use discretion when inhibiting Terrain-HSVT and always remember
to enable the system when appropriate.
When Terrain HSVT is inhibited the following terrain alerts functions are
inhibited:
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.5.3
• Aural Alerts
• Pop up alert on MFD
Sec 3
MFD
• Annunciator on PFD
• Terrain warning and caution shading on PFD synthetic terrain
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: See AFM for guidance on inhibiting Terrain-HSVT.
Figure 4-16 Terrain-HSVT Alerting Disabled (Alerts Inhibited) Annunciation (PFD & MFD)
2) Press the INHIBIT soft key to inhibit or enable Terrain SVT (choice dependent
on current state).
OR
1) Press the MENU key.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
1) In MAP page group, turn the small MFD knob to reach the HTerrain SVT Page.
4-14
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Figure 4-17 Select Inhibit Terrain-HSVT Alerting (Alerts Will Be Inhibited)
Sec 3
MFD
4.5.4
Sec 2
PFD
2) Use the large or small MFD knob to highlight “Inhibit Terrain” or “Enable
Terrain” (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT key.
Garmin Terrain-HSVT™ Reduced Protection
(RP) Mode
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
The reduced protection mode functionality allows operating with a reduction
in the alerting thresholds, and suppresses visual and aural annunciation of
caution alerts. Reduced protection allows low level operations and landings off
airport with a minimum number of alerts while continuing to provide protection
from terrain and obstacles. Reduced Protection should only be selected when
operating in visual contact with the terrain as alerting times are significantly less
than in normal mode.
Enable or disable Reduced Protection (RP) Mode on the Garmin TerrainHSVT page. The Page Menu selections allow you to hide or show aviation data
overlay on the Terrain Map page.
The MFD Terrain Scale will show a "RP" annunciation when RP Mode is
enabled. The "RP" annunciation will also be shown in the upper right corner of
the PFD.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Figure 4-18 MFD and PFD RP Mode Annunciation
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-15
Foreword
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
1) While viewing the Terrain page of the MAP page group, press MENU for Map
selections to enable or disable RP Mode on the Terrain page.
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 4-19 Enable or Disable RP Mode on the Terrain-HSVT Page
2) Press ENT to save the highlighted value.
1) While viewing the Terrain page of the MAP page group, press the RP soft key
to enable or disable RP Mode on the Terrain page.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
OR
RP Mode Annunciation
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
RP Mode Soft Key Label
Press To Toggle RP Mode
2) Press the RP soft key to toggle RP Mode on and off.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-20 Enable or Disable RP Mode on the Terrain-HSVT Page
4-16
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.5.5
Synthetic Vision Alerts and Annunciations
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Press the CLR key (returns to the currently viewed page)
OR
Press the ENT key (accesses the Terrain-HSVT Page)
Sec 1
System
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD (TerrainHSVT page only). The Terrain Alert Annunciation is shown to the upper left
of the Altimeter on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD. If the
Terrain-HSVT page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the
MFD.
To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
Foreword
Terrain-HSVT alerts employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level
in the normal mode, but only a WARNING alert severity level in RP mode.
When an alert is issued, visual annunciations are displayed and aural alerts are
simultaneously issued.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
Figure 4-21 Terrain-SVT Advisory Pop-Up on the MFD
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-17
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Alert Type
GPS signal re-established
Terrain System Test Successful
Terrain System Test in Progress
PFD/MFD Alert
Annunciation
None
None
Aural Message
“Terrain System Available”
“Terrain System test OK”
None
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Terrain Alerting is disabled
None
No GPS position
“Terrain System Not Available”
Excessively degraded GPS
signal
Terrain SVT System Test Fail
“Terrain System Failure”
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Table 4-3 Terrain-SVT System Test Status Annunciations
Alert Type
PFD/MFD Alert
Annunciation
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
FLTA Terrain Caution
(RTC-C, ITI-C)
FLTA Terrain Caution
(RLC-C, ILI-C)
FLTA Terrain Warning
(RTC-W, ITI-W)
FLTA Terrain Warning
(RLC-W, ILI-W)
FLTA Obstacle Caution
(ROC-C, IOI-C)
FLTA Obstacle Warning
(ROC-W, IOI-W)
Aural Message
“Caution, Terrain, Terrain”
“Caution, Wire, Wire”
“Warning, Terrain, Terrain”
“Warning, Wire, Wire”
“Caution, Obstacle, Obstacle”
“Warning, Obstacle, Obstacle”
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Table 4-4 Terrain-HSVT Alerts Summary
4-18
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.5.6
Mute Caution Alerts
Sec 2
PFD
1) When the MUTE CTN soft key label is present, press the MUTE CTN key (Aural
Caution Alerts will be muted).
OR
Sec 1
System
To Mute or Unmute Caution Alerts:
Foreword
Aural Caution Alert, when present, may be suppressed by pressing the MUTE
CTN soft key or selecting Mute Caution Alerts from the Menu.
2) Press the MENU key, select Mute Caution Alerts, and press ENT.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-22 Mute and Unmute Caution Alerts
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-19
SVT Alerts When Is Terrain Inhibited
If the pilot desires to retain the Terrain warning shading on PFD synthetic
terrain even when Terrain HSVT is inhibited then select the Enable SVT Terrain
Alerts When Inhibited menu option.
To Enable or Disable SVT Terrain Alerts When Terrain Is Inhibited:
1) While viewing the Terrain-HSVT page of the MAP page group, press the MENU
key.
2) Highlight Disable SVT Terrain Alerts When Inhibited and press ENT.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.5.7
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-23 Enable/Disable SVT Terrain Alerts When Inhibited
4-20
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.6
Traffic Systems
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 7
Symbols
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
NOTE: Traffic is also displayed in the SVT feature on the PFD.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
NOTE: Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to both
Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS) and TIS. Aircraft without altitude reporting
capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb descent
indication.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: TIS and TAS are mutually exclusive.
Sec 3
MFD
TAS refers to an active Traffic Advisory System that may be optionally
displayed on the PFD and/or MFD. The TAS is installed separately from the G600
system. There are variations in performance and control among the various
G600-compatible TAS systems. Refer to the appropriate TAS documentation for
detailed information on the operation of the TAS system. This section describes
the display and control functions available on the G600 system.
Sec 2
PFD
TAS/TCAS 1 Traffic (Optional)
Sec 1
System
4.6.1
Foreword
The Traffic function requires the installation of a compatible traffic device
and will then provide a separate traffic page in the Map page group as well as the
overlay of traffic on the Map Navigation pages. TIS and TAS cannot be displayed
at the same time. If the aircraft has a TAS unit installed, the GDU 620 will be
configured for TAS. If no TAS unit is installed and a GTX Mode-S transponder
is installed then the GDU 620 will be configured for TIS. A pilot can tell which
data is being displayed by the label in the top left corner (TAS/TCAS: OPER
for TAS/TCAS data and TIS: OPER for TIS data). TIS data comes from a GTX
transponder. Coverage is limited to specific areas as shown in the Airmen’s
Information Manual (AIM). TAS data comes from a TAS unit such as a Garmin
GTS 800 or 820, Skywatch 497, KTA 810, or other unit. Coverage follows the
aircraft. In the Navigation Map page setup you can select the maximum range at
which traffic symbols are shown. Once outside of the selected range, traffic will
be decluttered. The Traffic soft key will still be available. The Garmin GDL 88H
can provide TIS-B and ADS-B information. The Garmin GTS ADS-B products
can also provide ADS-B information.
4-21
Sec 3
MFD
Displaying and Operating Traffic (TAS Systems)
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TAS traffic data in relation to the
aircraft’s current position and altitude. Traffic page orientation is always heading
up. The traffic mode and altitude filter mode are annunciated in the upper left
corner.
Operating
Mode
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.6.1.1
Range Ring
Diameter
Non-Threat
Traffic
Traffic Advisory,
Off Scale Aircraft
is Out of Range,
1200 ft Above and
Climbing
Traffic Advisory,
Aircraft is 5000
ft Above and
Descending
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Ownship
Symbol
Non-Bearing Traffic (System is Unable to
Determine Bearing), Aircraft Distance is
8.0 NM, 1100 ft Above and Descending
Figure 4-24 Traffic Map Page - TAS/TCAS
Sec 7
Symbols
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix B
Index
Proximity Advisory,
1200 ft Above and
Climbing
4.6.1.2
Switching from Standby Mode to Operating Modes
The unit must be in operating mode for traffic to be displayed.
1) While viewing the Traffic page of the MAP page group, select the OPERATE soft
key or press the MENU key and turn the small MFD knob to select Operating
Mode.
2) To switch to Standby Mode from the Traffic Page, select the STANDBY soft
key.
3) Select the ALT MODE soft key to change the altitude volume.
4) Select the STANDBY soft key to place the system in the Standby mode.
STANDBY is displayed in the Traffic mode field.
4-22
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.6.1.3
Range Ring
Sec 1
System
Pressing the RNG keys will zoom in and out in preset steps depending on
the installed equipment.
4.6.1.4
Foreword
NOTE: Not all TAS systems can be controlled from the G500H. The Operate/
Standby soft keys may not be displayed. An alert will be generated when
Standby is selected and the aircraft is in the air.
Altitude Display
Sec 2
PFD
Changing the altitude display mode
1) Press the ALT MODE soft key to change the altitude filter.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Displayed Traffic Range
-9900 ft to 2700 ft
-2700 ft to 2700 ft
-2700 ft to 9900 ft
All Traffic Shown (-9900 to 9900 feet)
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Altitude Mode
Below
Normal
Above
Unrestricted
Sec 3
MFD
2) Select the desired altitude filter by pressing the BELOW, NORMAL,
ABOVE, or UNRSTD (unrestricted) soft keys. The selection is displayed in the
Altitude mode field.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Table 4-5 Displayed Traffic Range
Sec 7
Symbols
NOTE: Traffic Advisories (TAs) are always displayed, regardless of altitude
mode.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-23
TAS/TCAS Symbology
Traffic is displayed using four different symbols.
TAS Symbol
Description
Other Traffic
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.6.1.5
Sec 2
PFD
Proximity Advisory (PA)
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Sec 3
MFD
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
A Traffic Advisory (TA) alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding
aircraft. Closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria for the
specific traffic system. A Traffic Advisory that is beyond the selected display
range is indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative
bearing of the intruder.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The traffic system determines the type of symbol used for each target. Refer
to the traffic system documentation for information regarding the criteria used
to determine target type.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Table 4-6 TAS/TCAS Traffic Symbol Description
4-24
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.6.1.6
Traffic System Status
Sec 2
PFD
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
Mode
Sec 3
MFD
TEST
(also shown in white in center of page)
TAS Self-test Initiated
OPERATING
TAS Operating
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
TAS Standby
If the unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the
center of the Traffic Map Page.
Table 4-8 TAS/TCAS Failure Annunciations
Appendix A
FAILED
Data is not being received from the TAS unit.
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data).
Data is not being received from the TAS unit.
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the unit is
self-reporting a failure.
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit.
Sec 8
Glossary
DATA FAILED
Description
Sec 7
Symbols
NO TRFC DATA
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Table 4-7 TAS/TCAS Modes
TRFC FAIL
Sec 1
System
The traffic mode is indicated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map
Page.
Foreword
NOTE: Refer to the equipment documentation for information on the
self-test and operating modes.
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-25
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
Sec 1
System
Foreword
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a
banner at the lower left corner of maps on which traffic can be displayed.
Sec 2
PFD
TA OFF SCALE*
TA/ X.XNM/± XX ↕**
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory.
Annunciation indicates distance in NM, altitude
separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow
(climbing/descending).
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory.
Annunciation indicates distance in NM, altitude
separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow
(climbing/descending). The system distance units are set
to Metric or Imperial and are shown as such in all other
cases except for the traffic distance annunciation.
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 4-9 TAS/TCAS Traffic Status Annunciations
For TAS traffic, TEST MODE can be initiated from the Page Menu (press the
MENU key) when the traffic device is in Standby mode.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
TA X.X ± XX ↕**
Description
4-26
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.6.1.7
Traffic Pop-Up
Sec 1
System
NOTE: The traffic pop-up will not appear when your aircraft is on the
ground.
Foreword
When the GDU 620 MFD is displaying any page (other than the Traffic page)
and a traffic alert becomes active, the Traffic pop-up will be displayed.
Press ENT to go directly to the Traffic page.
Sec 2
PFD
OR
Press CLR to return to the previously viewed page.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Traffic Pop-Up
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-25 Traffic Pop-Up
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-27
Foreword
4.6.2
TIS Traffic (Optional)
Sec 1
System
WARNING: The Traffic Information Service (TIS) is intended for advisory
use only. TIS is intended to help the pilot locate traffic visually. It is the
responsibility of the pilot to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.
Sec 2
PFD
NOTE: TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of
a TIS-capable terminal radar site. Aircraft without an operating transponder
are invisible to both Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS) and TIS. Aircraft without
altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data
or climb descent indication.
Sec 3
MFD
NOTE: TIS and TAS are mutually exclusive.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: Traffic is also displayed in the SVT feature on the PFD.
The type of traffic systems that is installed is determined by the traffic page
display in the upper left corner of the MFD.
If Traffic Information Service (TIS) is configured, TIS will be displayed in the
upper left corner of the MFD.
Traffic Information Service (TIS) is designed to help in detection and
avoidance of other aircraft. TIS uses the Mode S transponder for the traffic data
link. TIS receives traffic information from ground stations, and is updated every
five seconds. The GDU 620 displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5 NM
radius, from 3000 feet below to 3500 feet above the requesting aircraft. Traffic is
displayed according to TCAS symbology using three different symbols.
4.6.2.1
Traffic Map Page
The Traffic Map Page is configured to show surrounding TIS traffic data in
relation to the aircraft’s current position and altitude, without clutter from the
basemap. Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is
no valid heading.
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map
Page. When the aircraft is on the ground, TIS automatically enters Standby
Mode. Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches from Standby to Operating
Mode and the GDU 620 begins to display traffic information.
4-28
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page
1) Turn the large MFD knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small MFD knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
Sec 1
System
3) Confirm TIS is in Operating Mode:
Select the OPERATE soft key to begin displaying traffic.
OR
Sec 2
PFD
1) Press the MENU key.
2) Select Operate Mode (shown if TIS is in Standby Mode) and then press the ENT
key.
Sec 3
MFD
Operating
Mode
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 7
Symbols
Proximity Advisory,
Aircraft is 3000 feet
above, descending
and moving in the
direction of the line
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Traffic Advisory,
Aircraft is 1200 feet
above, climbing,
and moving in the
direction of the line
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-26 Traffic Map Page - TIS
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-29
Foreword
4.6.2.2
TIS Symbology
TIS Symbol
Description
Sec 1
System
Non-Threat Traffic
Sec 2
PFD
Proximity Advisory (PA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Table 4-10 TIS Traffic Symbols
A Traffic Advisory (TA) alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding
aircraft. Closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic
Advisory that is beyond the selected display range is indicated by a half TA
symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the traffic
is moving, to the nearest 45º. Traffic information for which TIS is unable to
determine the bearing (non-bearing traffic) is displayed in the bottom center of
the Traffic Map Page or in a banner at the lower left corner of other map pages
on which traffic can be displayed.
The altitude difference between the requesting aircraft and other intruder
aircraft is displayed above/below the traffic symbol in hundreds of feet. If the
other aircraft is above the requesting aircraft, the altitude separation appears
above the traffic symbol; if below, the altitude separation appears below. Altitude
trend is displayed as an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in
either direction) to the right of the target symbol. Traffic symbols for aircraft
without altitude reporting capability appear without altitude separation or
climb/descent information.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Traffic Advisory (TA)
4-30
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.6.2.3
TIS Limitations
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
TIS is NOT intended to be used as a collision avoidance system and does not
relieve the pilot of responsibility to “see and avoid” other aircraft. TIS should not
be used for avoidance maneuvers during IMC or other times when there is no
visual contact with the intruder aircraft. TIS is intended only to assist in visual
acquisition of other aircraft in VMC. No recommended avoidance maneuvers
are provided for, nor authorized, as a direct result of a TIS intruder display or
TIS advisory.
Foreword
NOTE: This section on TIS Limitations is not comprehensive. Garmin
recommends the user review the TIS Limitations section of the Aeronautical
Information Manual, Section 1-3-5.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
TIS relies on surveillance of the Mode S radar, which is a “secondary
surveillance” radar similar to the ATCRBS. TIS operation may be intermittent
during turns or other maneuvering. TIS is dependent on two-way, “line-ofsight” communication between the aircraft and the Mode S radar. Whenever the
structure of the client aircraft comes between the transponder antenna (usually
located on the underside of the aircraft) and the ground-based radar antenna,
the signal may be temporarily interrupted. Other limitations and anomalies
associated with TIS are described in the AIM, Section 1-3-5.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
While TIS is a useful aid to visual traffic avoidance, it has some system
limitations that must be fully understood to ensure proper use. Many of these
limitations are inherent in secondary radar surveillance. In other words, the
information provided by TIS will be no better than that provided to ATC. TIS
will only display aircraft with operating transponders installed.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-31
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Garmin is not responsible for Mode S
geographical coverage. Operation of the
ground stations is the responsibility of the
FAA. Refer to the Aeronautical Information
Manual for a Terminal Mode S Radar Site Map
covering the U.S.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
NOTE: TIS will be unavailable at low altitudes in many areas of the U.S.,
particularly in mountainous regions. Also, when flying near the “floor” of
radar coverage in a particular area, intruders below the client aircraft may
not be detected by TIS.
TIS information is collected one radar scan prior to the scan during which
the uplink occurs. Therefore, the surveillance information is approximately
five seconds old. In order to present the intruders in a “real time” position,
the TIS ground station uses a “predictive algorithm” in its tracking software.
This algorithm uses track history data to extrapolate intruders to their expected
positions consistent with the time of display in the cockpit. Occasionally, aircraft
maneuvering will cause this algorithm to induce errors in the display. These
errors primarily affect relative bearing information and traffic target track vector
(it will lag); intruder distance and altitude will remain relatively accurate and
may be used to assist in “see and avoid.” Some of the more common examples
of these errors follow:
• When client or intruder aircraft maneuvers excessively or abruptly, the
tracking algorithm may report incorrect horizontal position until the
maneuvering aircraft stabilizes.
• When a rapidly closing intruder is on a course that crosses the client aircraft
course at a shallow angle (either overtaking or head on) and either aircraft
abruptly changes course within 0.25 NM, TIS may display the intruder on
the opposite side of the client than it actually is.
These are relatively rare occurrences and will be corrected in a few
radar scans once the course has stabilized.
4-32
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
• A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage. In flat terrain, the
coverage extends from about 3000 feet upward at 55 miles. Terrain and
obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in all
directions.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and
out of range of an adjacent site.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the TIScapable Mode S radar site.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service.
Sec 3
MFD
Traffic may not be displayed in the radar coverage area due to the following:
Sec 2
PFD
A “Traffic Not Available” (TNA) voice alert is generated when the TIS service
becomes unavailable or is out of range.
Sec 1
System
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator
on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds and remaining displayed until no TAs are
detected in the area.
To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft,
the “Traffic” voice alert is generated only when the number of TAs
increases. For example, when the first TA is displayed, a voice and visual
annunciation are generated. As long as a single TA remains on the display,
no additional voice alerts are generated. If a second TA appears on the
display or if the number of TAs initially decreases and then subsequently
increases, another voice alert is generated.
Foreword
4.6.2.4
TIS Alerts
When the number of Traffic Advisories (TAs) on the Traffic Map Page
increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
• Traffic does not have an operating transponder.
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-33
NOTE: The traffic pop-up will not appear when your aircraft is on the
ground.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.6.2.5
Traffic Pop-Up
When the GDU 620 MFD is displaying any page (other than the NAV Traffic
page) and a traffic alert becomes active, the Traffic Warning pop-up will be
displayed.
Press ENT to go directly to the Traffic page.
OR
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Press CLR to return to the previously viewed page.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Traffic Pop-Up
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Figure 4-27 Traffic Pop-Up
4-34
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
The transponder has failed
TIS is unavailable or out of range
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
UNAVAILABLE
Data is not being received from the transponder
Data is being received from the transponder, but a
failure is detected in the data stream
Sec 3
MFD
FAILED*
Description
Sec 2
PFD
DATA FAILED*
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action
Table 4-11 TIS Failure Annunciations
OPERATING
FAIL
Appendix B
Index
TIS Failed*
Appendix A
TIS Standby
STANDBY
(Also shown in white in center of
page)
Sec 8
Glossary
TIS Operating
Traffic Display Enabled Icon
(Other Maps)
Table 4-12 TIS Modes
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 7
Symbols
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Mode
Sec 5
Additional
Features
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
When the aircraft is on the ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. If
traffic is selected for display on another map while Standby Mode is selected,
the traffic display enabled icon is crossed out (also the case when TIS has
failed). Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches to Operating Mode and traffic
information is displayed. The mode can be changed manually using soft keys or
the page menu.
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 1
System
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA*
Foreword
4.6.2.6
TIS System Status
The GDU 620 performs an automatic test of TIS during power-up. If
TIS passes the test, TIS enters Standby Mode on the ground or Operating
Mode in the air. If TIS fails the power up test, an annunciation is shown
in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
4-35
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Switching Between TIS Operating Modes
1) Turn the large MFD knob to the MAP page group and then turn the small MFD
knob to the Traffic Map Page.
2) Select the STANDBY or OPERATE soft key to switch between modes. The mode
is displayed in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
OR
Sec 2
PFD
1) Press the MENU key.
2) Select Operate mode or Standby mode whether airborne or on the ground.
Sec 3
MFD
The annunciations indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner
at the lower left corner of maps on which traffic can be displayed.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
NOTE: An alert will be generated when Standby is selected and the aircraft
is in the air.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
3) Press the ENT key.
Traffic Status
Banner
Annunciation
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range
TA OFF SCALE* Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected
display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory
TA/ X.XNM/± XX↕ Annunciation indicates distance in NM, altitude separation
**
in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow (climbing/
descending)
Appears if traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds
If after another 6 seconds data is not received, traffic is removed
AGE MM:SS
from the display
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced as the age
increases
The displayed data is not current (6 to 12 seconds since last
message)
TRFC COAST
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when this
message is displayed
4-36
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 2
PFD
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Sec 1
System
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
TRFC UNAVAIL
Foreword
TRFC RMVD
Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting (12 to 60
seconds since last message)
Traffic may exist within the selected display range, but it is not
displayed
Traffic data has failed
Traffic has not been detected
The traffic service is unavailable or out of range
Table 4-13 TIS Traffic Status Annunciations
ADS-B Traffic (Optional)
Sec 3
MFD
4.6.3
OPR/STBY
Motion
Alt Mode
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
30 Sec
1 Min
2 Min
5 Min
Back
Below
Normal
Above
Unrestricted
Back
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Absolute
Relative
Off
Duration
Deselect
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
ADS-B In allows a properly-equipped aircraft to receive TIS-B and other
aircraft equipped with ADS-B out capability.
Back
When in Standby mode, pressing the MENU key will show the Page menu
where the traffic LRU can be placed into TEST mode.
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-31 ADS-B Traffic Page Functional Diagram
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-37
Traffic targets displayed on the dedicated traffic page may be selected in order
to obtain additional information about a traffic target.
1) Press the small MFD knob to start target selection.
2) Turn the small or large MFD knobs to step through selection of the available
targets.
Sec 2
PFD
Foreword
Target Selection
Sec 1
System
4.6.3.1
3) After selecting a target, you can press the small MFD knob to leave the target
selected, and return the small MFD to page selection mode.
ADS-B and
TCAS Status and
Altitude Filter
Map
Orientation
Selected
Traffic Info
Range Ring
Radius
Traffic Motion
Vector
Basic Directional
Traffic, 4000 ft
Below and
Climbing
Ownship
Icon
Range Rings
Turn Cursor
Knob for
Next Target
Selected Vector
Motion and
Duration
Figure 4-32 ADS-B Traffic Page (Absolute Motion)
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
4) Use the DESELECT softkey to turn off selected traffic.
NOTE: Traffic targets within 1200 ft vertical separation and 6NM from
Appendix B
Index
the ownship are depicted as proximate targets.
4-38
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Symbol
Foreword
Description
Basic Non-Directional Traffic
Basic Directional Traffic
Sec 1
System
Basic Off-scale Selected Traffic
Proximate Non-Directional Traffic
Sec 2
PFD
Proximate Directional Traffic
Sec 3
MFD
Proximate Off-scale Selected Traffic
Non-Directional Alerted Traffic
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Off-Scale Non-Directional Alerted Traffic
Directional Alerted Traffic
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Off-Scale Directional Alerted Traffic
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Non-Directional Surface Vehicle
Directional Surface Vehicle
NOTE: Color of basic and proximate traffic is dependent on airborne/on-ground
Sec 7
Symbols
Table 4-20 ADS-B Traffic Symbols
status of target (target is brown when on the ground, see the surface vehicles).
Status
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-39
Appendix B
Index
TCAS Status
If a TCAS system is integrated with the ADS-B system then this shows the
current status of the TCAS system. When the ADS-B system is integrated with a
TCAS system, the controls are provided on the installed navigator.
Appendix A
ADS-B Status
ADS-B Status displays the current status of traffic application: Off, Surface,
Airborne, N/A, Fail, or Test.
Sec 8
Glossary
4.6.3.2
NOTE: Absolute motion vectors match the color of the intruder (white or
yellow). Relative motion vectors are green except for Traffic Advisories whose
Relative Motion vectors are yellow. The annunciation on the bottom of the
dedicated traffic page indicates which vector type is selected and their length.
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
4.6.3.3
Motion Vector
When Absolute Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors extending from the
traffic targets depict the target reported track and speed over the ground. When
Relative Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors extending from the traffic targets
display how the traffic target is moving relative to your aircraft. These vectors are
calculated using the traffic targets track and ground speed and your aircraft’s track
and ground speed. These two values are combined to depict where the traffic target
is moving with respect to your aircraft and indicates where the traffic target will be,
relative to your aircraft, at the time specified by the length of the vector.
Figure 4-33 Absolute Motion (White Vectors)
Appendix B
Index
NOTE: Relative Motion vectors are unavailable when the aircraft is on
the ground. The duration will be annunciated as UNAVAIL after “RELATIVE
MOTION -” at the bottom of the screen.
4-40
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Vector Duration
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The Vector Duration selection sets the time that the vector will show the
calculated distance and direction of the traffic target. A longer duration will
result in a longer vector. Press the smart key for the desired duration.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-34 Relative Motion (Green Vectors)
Altitude Filter
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-41
Appendix B
Index
Table 4-21 Displayed Traffic Range
Appendix A
Displayed Traffic Range
-9900 ft to 2700 ft
-2700 ft to 2700 ft
-2700 ft to 9900 ft
All Traffic Shown (-9900 to 9900 feet)
Sec 8
Glossary
Altitude Mode
Below
Normal
Above
Unrestricted
Sec 7
Symbols
The Altitude Filter limits the traffic displayed to the Below, Normal, Above or
Unrestricted altitude block as listed in the “Displayed Traffic Range” table. The
filter altitudes are relative to ownship altitude. Press the Alt Mode smart key to
display the altitude smart keys. Press the smart key to select the altitude filter
value.
XM WX Satellite Weather (Optional)
The primary map for viewing XM WX Satellite Weather data are the Weather
Data Link Pages in the Map Page Group. These are the only GDU 620 map
displays capable of all available XM WX Satellite weather products. The XM WX
Satellite Weather pages may be oriented to either Track Up or North Up.
4.7.1
Using XM WX Satellite Weather Products
When a weather product is active on the Weather Data Link Page or the
Navigation Map Page, the age of the data is displayed on the screen. The age of
the product is based on the time difference between when the data was assembled
on the ground and the current GPS time. Weather products are refreshed at
specific intervals (defined in the Refresh Rate column).
If a weather product is not received within the 30, 60, 90, or 120 minute
Expiration Time intervals, the data is considered expired and is removed from
the display. This ensures that the displayed data is consistent with what is
currently being broadcast by XM WX Satellite Radio services. If more than half
of the expiration time has elapsed from the time the data is received, the color of
the product age displayed changes to yellow.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.7
4-42
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.7.2
Customizing the XM WX Satellite Weather Map
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Each Wx Data Link Map page may be customized individually. The Wx
Data Link Map pages are customized by selecting options from the Page Menu.
The Page Menu options include choices for Weather Setup and displaying the
Weather Legends. The Weather Setup choice covers selections for adjusting the
viewing ranges of the weather products.
1) While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 5
Additional
Features
2) Turn the Large or Small MFD knob to select Weather Setup (1/2) or Weather
Setup (2/2) and press ENT.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 4-28 Weather Page Menu Options
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-29 Weather Setup Group Selection
Appendix A
5) Turn the large MFD knob to the next desired option or press the small MFD
knob to cancel and return to the XM Weather Data Link Map Page.
Sec 8
Glossary
4) Press ENT to save a selection.
Sec 7
Symbols
3) With the Data Link Setup Menu displayed, turn the Large MFD knob to
highlight the desired item and then turn the small MFD knob to select the
desired weather feature value. Where a value (such as 100 NM) is selected,
weather data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value (100 NM)
and lower.
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-43
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
WX Page Menu - Weather Setup
Menu Item
Adjustment
Map Orientation
NEXRAD Data Viewing Range
NEXRAD Legend
Source
Echo Top Data Viewing Range
Cloud Top Data Viewing Range
Lightning Data Viewing Range
Cell Mov Data Viewing Range
SIG/AIR Viewing Range
PIREPS Data Viewing Range
METAR Data Viewing Range
Surface Data Viewing Range
Frz Lvl Data Viewing Range
Wnds Aloft Data Viewing Range
County Data Viewing Range
TFR Data Viewing Range
AIREPS Data Viewing rnage
Icing Data Viewing Range
Turbulence Data Viewing Range
North Up, Track Up
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
On/Off
US, Canada
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Cyclone Data Viewing Range
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Table 4-14 XM Weather Page Menu Setup Options
4-44
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to
determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link
weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by
the data link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated
weather product age.
Sec 3
MFD
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in,
near, or around areas of hazardous weather. Information contained within
data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather
conditions.
Sec 2
PFD
The product label in the legend will turn yellow at half the expiration time
and grey when expired. Expired products will not be shown on the display.
Sec 1
System
The weather product symbols, the expiration time and the broadcast rate are
shown in the following table. The broadcast rate represents the interval at which XM
WX Satellite Radio broadcasts new signals that may or may not contain new weather
data. It does not represent the rate at which weather data is updated or new content
is received by the Data Link Receiver. Weather data is updated at intervals that are
defined and controlled by XM WX Satellite Radio and its data vendors.
Foreword
4.7.3
XM Weather Symbols and Product Age
XM WX Weather Symbols and Product Age
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-45
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
NEXRAD (NEXRAD and Echo Top are Mutually Exclusive)
Echo Top (Cloud Top and Echo Top Mutually Exclusive)
(NEXRAD and Echo Top Mutually Exclusive)
Cloud Top (Cloud Top and Echo Top Mutually Exclusive)
XM Lightning
Cell Movement
SIGMETs / AIRMETs
METARs
City Forecast
Surface Analysis
Freezing Levels
Winds Aloft
County Warnings
PIREPS
TFRs
AIREPS
Icing
Turbulence
Cyclone Warnings
30
30
60
30
30
60
90
90
60
120
90
60
90
60
90
90
180
60
Table 4-15 Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
NOTE: Product age for individual reports of XM AIRMETs, SIGMETs, City
Forecasts, County Warnings, Cell Movement and TFRs are not provided
by XM Weather Service.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Weather Product
Appendix A
Product age indication for XM Icing Potential and Turbulence is not
included on the weather map. The valid time for these products is
displayed on the weather map in place of the generation time.
Appendix B
Index
The valid time indication for XM Freezing Level, Winds Aloft and Canada
Winds Aloft is not displayed. Instead, the generation time for these is
displayed.
4-46
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Symbol
Description
Foreword
Flood
Severe Thunderstorm
Sec 1
System
Tornado
Sunny
Sec 2
PFD
Part Sun
Sec 3
MFD
Cloudy
Rainy
T-Storm
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Snow
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Windy
Foggy
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Haze
High/Low Temp
XM Weather Legends
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-47
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Appendix A
The LEGEND soft key displays a pop-up legend of the currently used weather
products. Pressing the LEGEND soft key again, the MFD knob, the ENT, or
CLR keys will remove the legend.
1) A full page legend can be selected by selecting the Weather Legend option in
the XM Weather Map Menu or pressing the LEGEND soft key on the Weather
Map Page. The legend displayed will match the selected weather products. Turn
the large or small MFD knobs to scroll through the legend, if necessary.
Sec 8
Glossary
4.7.4
Sec 7
Symbols
Table 4-16 Weather Symbols
4-48
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Figure 4-31 Weather Legends
XM NEXRAD
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
NEXRAD data is not real-time. The lapsed time between collection, processing,
and dissemination of NEXRAD images can be significant and may not reflect
the current radar synopsis. Due to the inherent delays and the relative age of
the data, it should be used for long-range planning purposes only. Never use
NEXRAD data or any radar data to penetrate hazardous weather. Instead, use it
in an early-warning capacity of pre-departure and en route evaluation.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar), is a network of 158 highresolution Doppler radar systems that are operated by the National Weather
Service (NWS). NEXRAD data provides centralized meteorological information
for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The maximum
range of a single NEXRAD radar site is 250 NM. The NEXRAD network provides
important information about severe weather for air traffic safety.
Sec 3
MFD
4.7.5
Sec 2
PFD
2) An abbreviated legend may be displayed on the upper right side of a WX Data
Link Map page for the applicable weather products when selected in the Page
Menu options for Weather.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-49
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Composite data from all the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is shown.
This data is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar
sweeps. The display of the information is color-coded to indicate the weather
severity level. All weather product legends can be viewed on the Weather Data
Link Page. For the NEXRAD legend, select the LEGEND soft key when NEXRAD
is selected for display.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-32 XM Weather - NEXRAD
Figure 4-33 NEXRAD Weather Legend
4-50
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Appendix B
Index
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Appendix A
• Ground clutter
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 8
Glossary
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
Sec 7
Symbols
• When zoomed in to a range of 30 NM, each square block on the display
represents an area of four square kilometers. The intensity level reflected
by each square represents the highest level of NEXRAD data sampled
within the area.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• NEXRAD composite reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna
elevation angle. An individual NEXRAD site cannot depict high altitude
storms at close ranges. It has no information about storms directly over
the site.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• NEXRAD composite reflectivity does not provide sufficient information
to determine cloud layers or precipitation characteristics. For example, it
is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet hail, and rain.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
4.7.5.2
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
Sec 3
MFD
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative
to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy
reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the letter Z). The value of Z
increases as the returned signal strength increases.
Sec 2
PFD
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply
put, certain types of weather reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a
radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the weather hazard level. For
instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
Sec 1
System
4.7.5.1
Reflectivity
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver.
Colors on the NEXRAD display directly correlate to the level of detected
reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous weather can be very complex.
Foreword
The display of radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or
ECHO TOPS is selected. Areas where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops
information is not currently available or is not being collected are indicated in
grayish-purple.
4-51
• Metallic dust from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar
scans
4.7.6
XM Weather Page Map Orientation
The Orientation option sets the orientation of the Wx Data Link Map pages.
1) While viewing the Wx Data Link Map 1, 2, or 3 of the Wx page group, press the
MENU key. With “Weather Setup” highlighted, press ENT.
2) Turn the small MFD knob to select “Weather Setup 1/2” and press ENT.
3) With the “Map Orientation” option active, turn the small MFD knob to change
the highlighted value.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
Figure 4-34 Weather Page Map Orientation
4) Press ENT to accept the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
5) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
4.7.7
NEXRAD Data Viewing Range
The NEXRAD Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range
where at and below the selected value NEXRAD weather products will be shown
on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
NEXRAD weather data will not be shown. For the value (such as 100 NM) that
is selected, NEXRAD data will be shown at the selected map ranges (such as 100
NM) and lower.
1) While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
2) Turn the small MFD knob to select “Weather Setup 1/2” and press ENT.
4-52
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4) Press ENT to accept the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
4.7.8
Sec 1
System
5) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Foreword
3) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight he NEXRAD Data Viewing Range value.
Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value.
NEXRAD Legend
Sec 2
PFD
The NEXRAD Legend selection provides the option of displaying an
abbreviated version of the NEXRAD legend in the top right region of the MFD.
The full legend is available by pressing the LEGEND soft key.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
1) While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the NEXRAD Legend value.
Sec 7
Symbols
3) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight Off or On. Press ENT to accept the
displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-35 NEXRAD Legend Selection
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-53
NEXRAD Source
The NEXRAD Legend selection provides the option of using US or Canadian
Nexrad data.
Figure 4-36 NEXRAD Source Selection
1) While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the NEXRAD Legend value.
2) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight US or Canada. Press ENT to accept the
displayed value.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.7.9
4-54
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.7.10
XM Echo Tops
Sec 1
System
Echo Tops data shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest
radar echo. The highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or
clouds; rather it indicates the highest altitude at which precipitation is detected.
Information is derived from NEXRAD data.
Foreword
NOTE: Due to similarities in color schemes, the display of Echo Tops is
mutually exclusive with Cloud Tops and NEXRAD.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-37 XM Weather - Echo Tops
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
The display of radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or
ECHO TOPS is selected. Areas where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops
information is not currently available or is not being collected are indicated in
grayish-purple.
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-55
The Echo Top Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range
where at and below that value Echo Top weather products will be shown on the
selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, Echo
Tops will not be shown. Where a value (such as 250 NM) is selected, Echo Top
data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value (250 NM) and lower.
1) While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Echo Top Data Viewing Range value.
2) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
3) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page, or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Echo Top Data Viewing Range
4-56
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.7.11
XM Cloud Tops
Sec 1
System
Cloud Tops data depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite
imagery.
Foreword
NOTE: Due to similarities in color schemes, the display of Cloud Tops is
mutually exclusive with Echo Tops and NEXRAD.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 7
Symbols
To display the Cloud Tops legend, select the LEGEND soft key when Cloud
Tops is selected for display. Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color
scaling to represent altitude, display of these weather products is mutually
exclusive. When Cloud Tops is activated, Echo Tops or NEXRAD data is not
shown.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-38 XM Weather - Cloud Tops
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-57
The Cloud Top Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map
range where at and below that value Cloud Top weather products will be shown
on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
Cloud Tops will not be shown. Where a value (such as 150 NM) is selected,
Cloud Top data will be shown at map ranges of that value (150 NM) and lower.
1) While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Cloud Top Data Viewing Range value.
2) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
3) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Cloud Top Data Viewing Range
4-58
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.7.12
XM WX Satellite Lightning
Foreword
Lightning data shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning
strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer
region. The exact location of the lightning strike is not displayed.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-39 XM Weather - Lightning
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
3) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 7
Symbols
2) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Lightning Data Viewing Range
The Lightning Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where
at and below that value Lightning weather products will be shown on the selected MFD
Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, Lightning will not be shown.
Where a value (such as 100 NM) is selected, NEXRAD data will be shown at
map ranges of the selected value (100 NM) and lower.
1) While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Lightning Data Viewing Range value.
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-59
XM SIGMETs and AIRMETs
SIGMETs
(SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs
(AIRmen’s METeorological Information) are broadcast for potentially hazardous
weather considered of importance to aircraft. A Convective SIGMET is issued
for hazardous convective weather. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather
condition occurring at a localized geographical position.
When enabled, SIGMET/AIRMETs advise the pilot of potentially hazardous
weather to all aircraft. SIGMET/AIRMET data covers icing, turbulence, dust,
and volcanic ash as issued by the National Weather Service. The update rate is
every 12 minutes.
Figure 4-40 XM Weather - AIRMETs
When enabled, the following AIRMETs are available for display:
• Icing
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.7.13
• Turbulence
• IFR conditions
Appendix B
Index
• Mountain obscuration
• Surface winds
4-60
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
SIGMET/AIRMET Viewing Range
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2) The Sigmet/Airmet information will be shown. Press the small MFD knob to
return to the previously viewed page.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Textual Sigmet/Airmets can be viewed by selecting the Sigmet/Airmet outline
on the Weather (WX) page.
1) While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight a Sigmet/Airmet line. Press ENT.
Sec 3
MFD
Viewing Textual Sigmet/Airmets
Sec 2
PFD
3) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 1
System
2) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Foreword
The SIGMET/AIRMET Viewing Range option allows you to select the map
range where at and below that value SIGMET/AIRMET products will be shown
on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
SIGMET/AIRMET will not be shown. Where a value (such as 100 NM) is
selected, SIGMET/AIRMET data will be shown at map ranges of the selected
value (100 NM) and lower.
1) While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the SIG/AIR Viewing Range value.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-41 XM Weather - AIRMETs (Text)
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-61
XM PIREPs
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) provide timely weather information for a
particular route of flight. When significant weather conditions are reported or
forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs. A
PIREP may contain non-forecast adverse weather conditions, such as low inflight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are issued
as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Figure 4-42 XM Weather - PIREPs
1) While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the PIREPs value.
2) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
3) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.7.14
4-62
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.7.15
XM METARs
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure reported for METARs is given in hectopascals
(hPa), except in the United States, where it is reported in inches of mercury
(in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
Foreword
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed aviation
database service area.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
METAR (METeorological Aerodrome Report), known as an Aviation Routine
Weather Report, is the standard format for current weather observations.
METARs are updated hourly and are considered current. METARs typically
contain information about the temperature, dew point, wind, precipitation,
cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure. They can also
contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical data.
METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
METAR Viewing Range
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-63
Appendix B
Index
The METAR Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where
at and below that value METAR weather products will be shown on the selected
MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, METARs will
not be shown. Where a value (such as 150 NM) is selected, METAR data will be
shown at map ranges of the selected value (150 NM) and lower.
Appendix A
Figure 4-43 XM Weather - Graphic METARs
Foreword
Sec 1
System
1) While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the METAR Data Viewing Range value.
2) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
3) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Textual METARs can be viewed by selecting an airport on the Map or Weather
(WX) pages.
1) While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight an airport with a METAR flag. Press ENT.
2) The Waypoint Information page for that airport will now be shown. Press the
WX soft key to view weather information for the waypoint.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Viewing Textual METARs
Figure 4-44 XM Weather - Textual METARs
3) Use the small MFD knob or the large MFD knob to scroll through the available
information.
4) Press the small MFD knob to return to the previously viewed page.
4-64
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.7.16
XM Winds Aloft
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Pressing the WX Alt Dn or WX Alt Up soft keys steps down or up in the
3,000 foot increments. In the figure below where 6000 feet is selected, Winds
Aloft data will be shown at 6000 feet.
Foreword
The Winds Aloft Altitude option allows you to select the altitude where at and
below that value Winds Aloft weather products will be shown on the selected
MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). Altitude can be selected in 3000 foot
increments from the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL. “ALT UNAVBL” is displayed
when the altitude is unsupported for a specific product and will never show data
on the map.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-45 XM Weather - Winds Aloft
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Figure 4-46 XM Weather - Winds Aloft Legend
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-65
The Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map
range where at and below that value Winds Aloft weather products will appear
on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
Winds Aloft will not be shown. Where a value (such as 100 NM) is selected,
Winds Aloft data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value (100 NM)
and lower.
1) While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range value.
2) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
3) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range
4-66
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.7.17
XM Surface Analysis and City Forecast
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Surface Analysis and City Forecast information is available for current and
forecast weather conditions. Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36,
and 48 hours by pressing the SRFC TIME soft key or in the Page Menu Weather
Setup options.
When enabled, the Surface Analysis forecast shows frontal lines indicating weather fronts and the direction they are moving. High and Low pressure
centers are noted with a large H or L. The Forecast Time menu item will step
through the intervals manually.
Foreword
NOTE: Surface Analysis and City Forecast data are displayed only within
the installed Aviation Database service area.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-47 XM Weather - Surface Analysis and City Forecast
Appendix A
Figure 4-48 XM Weather - Cold Front
Appendix B
Index
A Warm Front is where warm air replaces cold air. An orange line with
orange half moons that point in the direction of the warm air flow.
Figure 4-49 XM Weather - Warm Front
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 8
Glossary
A Cold Front is a front where cold air replaces warm air. A blue line with
blue triangles that point in the direction of the cold air flow.
4-67
Figure 4-50 XM Weather - Stationary Front
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 4-51 XM Weather - Occluded Front
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
An Occluded Front is where a cold front has overtaken and merged with a
warm front. The line alternates with the blue triangle and orange half moon symbols on the same side of the line pointing in the direction the front is moving.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
A Stationary Front is a front with very little horizontal movement. The line
alternates with orange and blue sections which point in opposite directions to
symbolize little movement.
Surface Data Viewing Range
The Surface Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range
where at and below that value Surface Data weather products will be shown on
the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
Surface Data will not be shown. Where a value (such as 150 NM) is selected,
Surface data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value (150 NM) and
lower.
1) While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Surface Data Viewing Range value.
2) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
3) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Forecast Time
The Forecast Time option allows you to select the forecast time when the Surface
and City Forecast weather products will appear on the selected MFD Wx
Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). Forecasts are available for intervals of
current, 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours. The interval is selected by pressing the
FCST TIME soft key on the Wx Data Link Map page.
4-68
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.7.18
XM County Warnings
Foreword
Sec 1
System
County data provides specific public awareness and protection weather
warnings from the National Weather Service (NWS). This can include
information on fires, tornadoes, severe thunderstorms, flood conditions, and
other natural disasters.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-52 XM Weather - County Warnings
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-69
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Appendix A
3) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 8
Glossary
2) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 7
Symbols
The County Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range
where at and below that value County weather products will be shown on the
selected MFD Wx Data Link Map pages (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, County
Data will not be shown. Where a value (such as 100 NM) is selected, County
data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value (100 NM) and lower.
1) While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the County Data Viewing Range value.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
County Data Viewing Range
XM TFRs
Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) provide detailed information for local
short term restrictions. The update rate is approximately every 20 minutes.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.7.19
TFR Detail
Figure 4-53 XM Weather - TFRs
2) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Appendix B
Index
1) While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the TFR Data Viewing Range option.
Appendix A
The Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) viewing range option selects
whether TFR information is shown on the GFDS Weather Map. TFR information
will be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, the
information will not be shown. For the value (such as 500 NM) selected, TFR
information will be shown at map ranges of that value (500 NM), and lower.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Select TFR Symbol
To View Details
3) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
4-70
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Viewing Textual TFRs
Sec 1
System
2) The TFR details will be shown.
Foreword
Textual TFRs can be viewed by selecting a TFR outline on the Weather (WX)
pages.
1) While viewing a XM Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight a TFR symbol (yellow circle). Press ENT.
3) Press the small MFD knob or ENT to return to the Weather page.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 4-54 XM Weather - Textual TFRs and Legend
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-71
XM Cell Movement
Cell Movement data shows the location and movement of storm cells as
identified by a ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares,
with direction of movement indicated with short, orange arrows.
Figure 4-55 XM Weather - Cell Movement
On most applicable maps, Cell Movement data is selected for display along
with NEXRAD. On the Weather Data Link Page, Cell Movement data can be
selected independently.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.7.20
4-72
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Cell Movement Data Viewing Range
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
2) Turn the small MFD knob to select “Weather Setup 2/2” and press ENT.
Sec 1
System
1) While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
Foreword
The Cell Movement Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map
range and below where Cell Movement weather products will appear on the
selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, Cell
Movement will not be shown. Where a value (such as 100 NM) is selected, Cell
Movement data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value (100 NM)
and lower.
4) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
5) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
3) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Cell Movement Data Viewing Range
value.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-73
XM AIREPs
Air Reports (AIREPs) are messages from an aircraft, typically from commercia
aircraft, to a ground station. AIREPs are similar to PIREPs.
1) While viewing Weather Setup 2/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the AIREPs Viewing Range option.
2) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
3) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.7.21
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-56 XM Weather - AIREPs
4-74
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
2) Press ENT to view text information. Press ENT again to return to the previous page.
Sec 1
System
1) While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight an airport with a AIREP.
Foreword
Viewing Textual AIREPs/PIREPs
Textual AIREPs/PIREPs can be viewed by selecting a AIREP on the Map or
Weather (WX) pages.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-57 XM Weather - AIREP Text Detail
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-75
XM Cyclone
The current location of the cyclone is shown along with its projected path
with the date and time.
1) While viewing Weather Setup 2/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Cyclone Data Viewing Range option.
2) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
3) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.7.22
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Projected Path With Date
And Time
Sec 7
Symbols
Current Position Of Cyclone
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-58 XM Weather - Cyclone
4-76
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.7.23
XM Freezing Level
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Freezing Level data shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and
location at which the Freezing Level is found. When no data is displayed for a
given altitude, the data for that altitude has not been received, or is out of date
and has been removed from the display. New data appears at the next update.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-59 XM Weather - Freezing Levels
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-77
Appendix B
Index
4) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Appendix A
3) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 8
Glossary
2) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Frz Lvl Viewing Range value.
Sec 7
Symbols
1) While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Freezing Level Viewing Range
The Freezing Level Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range
where at and below that value Freezing Level weather products will be shown
on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
Freezing Level Data will not be shown. Where a value (such as 100 NM) is
selected, Freezing Level data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value
(100 NM) and lower.
XM Icing
The Icing product shows a graphic view of the current icing environment
in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific to aircraft
type). The Icing product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current
conditions at the time of the analysis. Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing
conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large, super cooled
water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat
areas are depicted as black and red blocks over the Icing colors. Icing and SLD
data are shown between 1,000 feet and 30,000 feet in 3,000 foot increments.
1) While viewing Weather Setup 2/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Icing Data Viewing Range value.
2) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
3) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.7.24
Figure 4-60 XM Weather - Icing and SLD
4) Press the WX Alt Dn or WX Alt Up keys to increase or decrease the
reporting altitude of icing in 3,000 foot increments. The selected altitude
is shown in a window above the altitude keys.
4-78
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.7.25
XM Turbulence
Sec 2
PFD
2) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 1
System
1) While viewing Weather Setup 2/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Turbulence Viewing Range value.
Foreword
Turbulence data identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude
air mass associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe
or extreme, at altitudes between 21,000 and 45,000 feet. Turbulence data is
intended to supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs.
3) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 3
MFD
4) Press the WX Alt Dn or WX Alt Up keys to increase or decrease the
reporting altitude of icing in 3,000 foot increments. The selected altitude
is shown in a window above the altitude keys.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-79
GFDS Weather (Optional)
GFDS Weather is an optional feature available with the Iridium® satellite
system that is interfaced through the optional Garmin GSR 56. The primary
maps for viewing Garmin Flight Data System (GFDS) Weather data are the
Weather Data Link Pages in the Map Page Group. These are the only GDU 620
map displays capable of all available GFDS weather products. The Wx Weather
pages may be oriented to either Track Up or North Up. Both GFDS and XM
Weather may be installed and selected individually. GFDS Weather coverage
is available throughout most of Europe, Canada and the U.S. Additional radar
coverage areas are being added continuously.
More detail on GFDS weather products and coverage can be found at:
http://fly.garmin.com/fly-garmin/gfds-weather/
NOTE: A system can be configured for both XM and GFDS, but both cannot
be displayed a the same time.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.8
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in,
near, or around areas of hazardous weather. Information contained within
data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather
conditions.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to
determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link
weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by
the data link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated
weather product age.
4-80
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
1) While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. Turn the large MFD knob to
highlight the “Display GFDS Weather” option. Press ENT. This setting will affect
the display of data link weather on the map pages as well as the Wx pages.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 4-61 Select GFDS Weather
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2) Select XM Weather by repeating the process and selecting the XM Weather
option.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-62 Select XM Weather
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-81
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.8.1
Register With GFDS
4.8.1.1
Register With GFDS
It is necessary to register the GDU with GFDS to utilize the weather products.
1) Call Garmin Customer Service to create a GFDS account. Provide the GDU
System ID and airframe info (model, tail number, etc).
2) Customer Service will issue an access code to enter on the GFDS Registration page.
3) While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
4) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight "Register With GFDS." Press ENT.
5) Turn the small MFD knob to select values and the large MFD knob to move to
the next position. Highlight REGISTER and press ENT to complete the process.
The GDU will contact the GFDS servers using the GSR 56 transceiver. If the access
code and system ID are correct, it will download and display the airframe info.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-63 Select GFDS Registration
4-82
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 4-64 GFDS Registration Page (Default and Completed)
3) With the Access Code field highlighted, press CLR to remove the access code.
Sec 7
Symbols
4) Any weather requests will now fail and the system will no longer be linked to the
GFDS account.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight “Register With GFDS.” Press ENT.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
1) While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
4.8.1.2
Deactivate Unit Registration With GFDS
Registration of the GDU unit with GFDS can be deactivated so that the unit can
no longer make requests to GFDS. This does not cancel the subscription.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-83
Using GFDS Satellite Weather Products
When a weather product is active on the Weather Data Link Page or the
Navigation Map Page, the age of the data is displayed on the screen. The age of
the product is based on the time difference between when the data was assembled
on the ground and the current GPS time. Weather products are refreshed at
selectable intervals.
If for any reason, a weather product is not refreshed within the 30, 60, 90,
or 120 minute Expiration Time intervals, the data is considered expired and is
removed from the display. This ensures that the displayed data is consistent with
what is currently being broadcast by GFDS Satellite Radio services. If more than
half of the expiration time has elapsed from the time the data is received, the
color of the product age displayed changes to yellow.
4.8.3
Customizing the GFDS Weather Map
Each Wx Data Link Map page may be customized individually. The Wx
Data Link Map pages are customized by selecting options from the Page Menu.
The Page Menu options include choices for Weather Setup and displaying the
Weather Legends. The Weather Setup choice covers selections for adjusting the
viewing ranges of the weather products.
1) While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. Turn the large MFD knob to
highlight the “Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.8.2
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Figure 4-65 Weather Page Menu Options
4-84
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
2) With the Data Link Setup Menu displayed, turn the Large MFD knob to select
the desired item.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-66 Weather Data Link Setup Menu Options
3) Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired weather feature option.
Sec 7
Symbols
5) Turn the large MFD knob to the next desired option or press the small MFD
knob to cancel and return to the GFDS Weather Data Link Map Page.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
4) Press ENT to save a selection.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-85
Menu Item
Adjustment
Map Orientation
PRECIP Data Viewing Range
PRECIP Legend
IR SAT Data Viewing Range
Lightning Data Viewing Range
SIG/Air Viewing Range
PIREPS Viewing Range
METAR Data Viewing Range
Wnd Aloft Data Viewing Range
TFR Data Viewing Range
North Up, Track Up
Off, 50 NM to 500 NM
On/Off
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Table 4-17 GFDS Weather Page Menu Setup Options
Weather Page Map Orientation
The Orientation option sets the orientation of the Wx Data Link Map pages.
1) While viewing the Wx Data Link Map 1, 2, or 3 of the Wx page group, press the
MENU key. With “Weather Setup” highlighted, press ENT.
2) With the “Map Orientation” option active, turn the small MFD knob to change
the highlighted value.
Figure 4-67 Weather Page Map Orientation
3) Press ENT to accept the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
4) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 5
Additional
Features
4.8.4
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
WX Page Menu - Weather Setup
4-86
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.8.5
GFDS Data Request
Sec 1
System
2) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight "GFDS Data Request." Press ENT.
Foreword
It is necessary to request the downloading of weather products. Requests can
be sent manually or set to automatically update at a selected rate.
1) While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 4-68 Select GFDS Data Request
Sec 5
Additional
Features
3) Turn the small MFD knob to select values and the large MFD knob to move to
the next position.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
Figure 4-69 GFDS Data Request Page
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-87
GFDS Data Request Coverage
Present Position GFDS Data Request
1) While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options.
2) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight "GFDS Data Request." Press ENT.
3) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight "Present Position." Press ENT.
4) The Present Position box will be checked and weather information will be
requested around your present position.
5) To deselect Present Position reporting, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
"Present Position." Press ENT.
Destination GFDS Data Request
1) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight "Destination." Press ENT.
2) The Destination box will be checked and weather information will be requested
around your flight plan destination.
3) To deselect Destination reporting, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
"Destination." Press ENT.
Flight Plan GFDS Data Request
1) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight "Flight Plan." Press ENT.
2) The range list will now be highlighted. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight
the desired range and press ENT.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.8.5.1
Figure 4-70 Flight Plan GFDS Data Request
4-88
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4) To deselect Flight Plan reporting, turn the large MFD knob to highlight "Flight
Plan." Press ENT.
Sec 1
System
Waypoint GFDS Data Request
1) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight "Waypoint." Press ENT.
Foreword
3) The Flight Plan box will be checked and weather information will be requested
along your flight plan forward of your present position for the range selected.
Sec 2
PFD
2) The Waypoint Selection field will now be highlighted. Turn the small MFD knob
to select the first character. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the next
character. When finished selecting the waypoint name, press ENT.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Appendix A
3) The Waypoint box will be checked and weather information will be requested
around the selected waypoint for the range selected (next operation).
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-71 Waypoint GFDS Data Request
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-89
Figure 4-72 Waypoint GFDS Data Request Range
2) Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired Diameter/Route Width and then
press ENT.
4.8.5.2
GFDS Data Request Auto Request
1) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight "Auto Request - Update Rate."
2) Turn the small MFD knob to select "Off" or an Update Rate. When finished
selecting the Update Rate, press ENT. The Update Rate will default to "OFF"
at each power cycle.
Foreword
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Diameter/Route Width GFDS Data Request
1) After selecting a coverage option in the previous section, the Diameter/Route
Width field will now be highlighted.
Appendix B
Index
Figure 4-73 GFDS Data Request Auto Update Rate
4-90
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.8.5.3
GFDS Data Request Manual Request
Foreword
Sec 1
System
The GFDS weather data may be updated at any time regardless of the automatic
update timing by selecting a Manual Request. When multiple requests are made,
some products are merged with the old data (SIGMETs/AIRMETs, TAFs, TFRs,
and METARs), but the old data of other products is discarded.
1) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight "Manual Request - Send Req."
2) Press ENT.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
3) The update request will occur immediately. The action will be noted in the
4.8.5.4
GFDS Data Request Status Window
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The Request Status window will show a response such as "OK" when manual
requests are made. The time for the next auto update will be shown.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Request Status window. The Auto Request time will be reset to the selected
value.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 4-74 Manual GFDS Data Request
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-91
Precipitation (PRECIP) Data Viewing Range
The PRECIP Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where
at and below the selected value PRECIP weather products will be shown on
the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
PRECIP weather data will not be shown. In the figure below where 500 NM is
selected, PRECIP data will be shown at map ranges of 500 NM and lower. TFRs
and METARs are the only weather products shown below 10 NM.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.8.6
Area Of No Coverage
1) While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. Turn the large MFD knob to
highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-75 GFDS PRECIP Weather Map Display and Legend
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Coverage Boundary
2) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight PRECIP Data Viewing Range. Turn the
small MFD knob to highlight the desired value.
3) Press ENT to accept the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
4) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
4-92
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.8.7
PRECIP Legend
Foreword
The PRECIP Legend selection provides the option of displaying an abbreviated
version of the PRECIP legend in the top right region of the MFD. The full legend
is available by pressing the LEGEND soft key.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 4-76 GFDS PRECIP Legend Selection
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
4) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
3) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight Off or On. Press ENT to accept the
displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight PRECIP Legend.
Sec 3
MFD
1) While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. Turn the large MFD knob to
highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-93
GFDS Infrared Satellite (IR SAT) Data Viewing
Range
IR SAT data is available over North America and Europe and depicts cloud
top temperatures from satellite imagery. Brighter cloud top colors indicate cooler
temperatures occurring at higher altitudes. Information is updated every half
hour.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.8.8
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-77 GFDS Infrared Satellite Data Map Display and Legend
IR SAT Data Viewing Range
The IR SAT Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range
where at and below that value IR SAT weather products will be shown on the
selected MFD GFDS Weather Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, IR SAT
will not be shown. For the selected value (such as 250 NM) is selected, IR SAT
data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value (250 NM) and lower.
1) While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. Turn the large MFD knob to
highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT.
2) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight IR SAT Data Viewing Range. Turn the
small MFD knob to highlight the desired value.
3) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
4) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
4-94
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.8.9
Sec 1
System
Lightning data shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning
strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer
region. The exact location of the lightning strike is not displayed. Only cloud to
ground strikes are reported in the US and extreme southern Canada (cloud to
cloud strikes are not reported).
Foreword
Data Link Lightning (DL LTNG) Data Viewing
Range
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-78 GFDS Data Link Lightning and Legend
4) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-95
Appendix B
Index
3) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Appendix A
2) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight DL LTNG Data Viewing Range.
Sec 8
Glossary
1) While viewing a GFDS Weather Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. Turn the large MFD knob to
highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT.
Sec 7
Symbols
The Lightning Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where
at and below that value Lightning weather products will be shown on the selected MFD
GFDS Weather Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, Lightning will not be shown.
Where a value (such as 250 NM) is selected, GFDS data will be shown at map
ranges of the selected value (250 NM) and lower.
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.8.10
SIGMETs and AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
SIGMETs
(SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs
(AIRmen’s METeorological Information) are broadcast for potentially hazardous
weather considered of importance to aircraft. A Convective SIGMET is issued
for hazardous convective weather. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather
condition occurring at a localized geographical position.
Sec 2
PFD
Cursor Location
MTN Obscures Visibility
Sec 3
MFD
Product Age
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Cursor On AIRMET/SIGMET Line
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Localized SIGMET
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Icing
IFR Line
SIGMET Line
Figure 4-79 GFDS Weather Page - AIRMETs/SIGMETs
When enabled, SIGMET/AIRMETs advise the pilot of potentially hazardous
weather to all aircraft. SIGMET/AIRMET data covers icing, turbulence, dust,
and volcanic ash as issued by the National Weather Service. The update rate is
every 12 minutes in the U.S. Elsewhere, updates are made as they are issued.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Viewing Textual SIGMETs/AIRMETs
Textual SIGMET/AIRMETs can be viewed by selecting an SIGMET/AIRMET
line on the Map or Weather (WX) pages.
1) While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight a SIGMET/AIRMET line. Press ENT.
2) The Waypoint Information page for that line will now be shown. Press the WX
soft key to view weather information.
4-96
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 4-80 GFDS Weather - AIRMETs/SIGMETs Detail and Legend
Sec 5
Additional
Features
When enabled, the following AIRMETs are available for display:
• Icing
• Turbulence
• IFR conditions
• Mountain obscuration
• Surface winds
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Appendix B
Index
4-97
Appendix A
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 8
Glossary
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 7
Symbols
SIGMET/AIRMET Viewing Range
The SIGMET/AIRMET Viewing Range option allows you to select the map
range where at and below that value SIGMET/AIRMET products will be shown
on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
SIGMET/AIRMET will not be shown. Where a value (such as 250 NM) is
selected, SIGMET/AIRMET data will be shown at map ranges of the selected
value (250 NM) and lower.
1) While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. Turn the large MFD knob to
highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT.
2) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight SIG/AIR Viewing Range.
3) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
4) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
AIREP/PIREP
Sec 2
PFD
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) provide timely weather information for a
particular route of flight. When significant weather conditions are reported or
forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs. A
PIREP may contain non-forecast adverse weather conditions, such as low inflight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are issued
as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Product Age
Cursor Location
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.8.11
Selected PIREP
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
PIREP Detail
Figure 4-81 GFDS Weather Page - AIREPs/PIREPs
1) While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
2) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the PIREPS Viewing Range value.
3) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
4) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
4-98
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Viewing Textual AIREPs/PIREPs
Sec 1
System
2) The Waypoint Information page for that airport will now be shown. Press the
WX soft key to view weather information for the waypoint.
Foreword
Textual AIREPs/PIREPs can be viewed by selecting an AIREP/PIREP on the
Map or Weather (WX) pages.
1) While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight an airport with an AIREP/PIREP. Press ENT.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-82 GFDS Weather - AIREPs/PIREPs Detail and Legend
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-99
Foreword
4.8.12
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure reported for METARs is given in hectopascals
(hPa), except in the United States, where it is reported in inches of mercury
(in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed aviation
database service area.
METAR (METeorological Aerodrome Report), known as an Aviation Routine
Weather Report, is the standard format for current weather observations.
METARs are generally updated hourly, but some site are more frequent. Special
updates are done as conditions warrant. METARs typically contain information
about the temperature, dew point, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud
heights, visibility, and barometric pressure. They can also contain information
on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical data. METARs are shown
as colored flags at airports that provide them.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
METARs
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Cursor Location
Sec 7
Symbols
Product Age
VFR METAR
Sec 8
Glossary
Selected METAR (MVFR)
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
IFR METAR
Figure 4-83 GFDS Weather - Graphic METARs and Legend
4-100
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Viewing Textual METARs
Sec 1
System
2) The Waypoint Information page for that airport will now be shown. Press the
WX soft key to view weather information for the waypoint.
Foreword
Textual METARs can be viewed by selecting an airport on the Map or Weather
(WX) pages.
1) While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight an airport with a METAR flag. Press ENT.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-84 GFDS Weather - METARs Detail and Legend
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-101
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
METAR Viewing Range
The METAR Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where
at and below that value METAR weather products will be shown on the selected
MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, METARs will
not be shown. Where a value (such as 150 NM) is selected, METAR data will be
shown at map ranges of the selected value (150 NM) and lower.
1) While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. Turn the large MFD knob to
highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT.
Sec 3
MFD
4) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
3) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight METAR Data Viewing Range.
4-102
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.8.13
Winds Aloft
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Winds Aloft data shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface
and at selected altitudes. Altitudes can be selected in 3000 foot increments from
the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL. Pressing the WX Alt Dn or WX Alt Up soft
keys steps down or up in 3,000 foot increments.
Product Age
Sec 2
PFD
Selected Altitude
Sec 3
MFD
Present Position
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Winds Aloft Symbol
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Winds Aloft Altitude Soft Keys
Figure 4-85 GFDS Weather - Winds Aloft
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-86 GFDS Weather - Winds Aloft Legend
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-103
The Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map
range where at and below that value Winds Aloft weather products will appear
on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
Winds Aloft will not be shown. When 150 NM is selected, Winds Aloft data will
be shown at map ranges of 150 NM and lower.
1) While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. Turn the large MFD knob to
highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT.
2) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range.
3) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
4) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range
4-104
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.8.14
GFDS TFRs
Foreword
Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) provide detailed information for local
short term restrictions. The update rate is approximately every 20 minutes.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
TFR Detail
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Select TFR Symbol
To View Details
Appendix A
2) Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value.
3) Press ENT to accept the displayed value.
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-105
Appendix B
Index
4) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the GFDS Weather Map page.
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 8
Glossary
1) While viewing a GFDS Weather Map page of the WX page group, turn the large
MFD knob to highlight the TFR Data Viewing Range option.
Sec 7
Symbols
The Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) viewing range option selects
whether TFR information is shown on the GFDS Weather Map. TFR information
will be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, the
information will not be shown. For the value (such as 500 NM) selected, TFR
information will be shown at map ranges of that value (500 NM), and lower.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-87 GFDS Weather - TFRs
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Viewing Textual TFRs
Textual TFRs can be viewed by selecting a TFR outline on the Weather (WX)
pages.
1) While viewing a GFDS Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight a TFR symbol (yellow circle). Press ENT.
2) The TFR details will be shown.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
3) Press the small MFD knob or ENT to return to the Weather page.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-88 GFDS Weather - Textual TFRs and Legend
4-106
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.9
FIS-B Weather (Optional)
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
4.9.2
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
There are possible abnormalities regarding displayed NEXRAD images. Some,
but not all, causes of abnormal displayed information include:
• Ground Clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes, when the radar antenna points directly at the sun
• Military aircraft deploy metallic dust which can cause alterations in radar scans
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Scheduled maintenance may put a radar off-line
Sec 3
MFD
NEXRAD Abnormalities
Sec 2
PFD
4.9.1
Sec 1
System
NOTE: The GDL 88H will send all FIS-B weather and NOTAM/TFR
information that it receives. There may be more information available than
is received by the GDL 88H. This can lead to the GDL88, and subsequently
the GDU620, displaying the status of the FIS-B data as “received” and
“current” even though some of the data for the region is missing.
Foreword
WSR-88D weather surveillance radar or NEXRAD (NEXt generation RADar) is
a Doppler radar system that has greatly improved the detection of meteorological
events such as thunderstorms, tornadoes, and hurricanes. An extensive network
of NEXRAD stations provides almost complete radar coverage of the continental
United States, Alaska, and Hawaii. The unobstructed range of each NEXRAD is
124 nautical miles. The GDL 88H receives the FIS-B information and sends it
to the GDU 620.
NEXRAD Limitations
4-107
Appendix B
Index
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Appendix A
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 8
Glossary
NOTE: Where it is noted that NOTAM data is available, it is possible only
a subset of the data is available and that more NOTAM reports may arrive
in future updates. Updates occur approximately every ten minutes.
Sec 7
Symbols
Certain limitations exist regarding the NEXRAD radar displays. Some, but
not all, are listed for the user’s awareness:
• The Regional NEXRAD “pixels” are 1.5 minutes (1.5 nautical miles
= 2.78 km) wide by 1 minute (1 nautical miles = 1.852 km) tall. The
CONUS NEXRAD “pixels” are 7.5 minutes (7.5 nautical miles = 13.89
km) wide by 5 minutes (5 nautical miles = 9.26 km) wide. Above 60
degrees of latitude the Regional NEXRAD “pixels” are 3 minutes/nautical
miles. CONUS NEXRAD is not available above 60 degrees of latitude.
The intensity level reflected by the pixel will be the highest level sampled
within the area covered by each pixel.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.9.3
NEXRAD Intensity
Colors are used to identify the different NEXRAD echo intensities (reflectivity)
measured in dBZ (decibels of Z). “Reflectivity” is the amount of transmitted power
returned to the radar receiver. Reflectivity (designated by the letter Z) covers a
wide range of signals (from very weak to very strong). So, a more convenient
number for calculations and comparison, a decibel (or logarithmic) scale (dBZ),
is used. The dBZ values increase as the strength of the signal returned to the
radar increases.
4.9.4
NEXRAD
When enabled, NEXRAD weather information is shown. Composite data
from all of the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is shown. This data is
composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The
display of the information is color-coded to indicate the weather level severity.
Refer to the legend for a description of the color code.
The NEXRAD option has selections of Regional, CONUS, or Combined
NEXRAD. CONUS NEXRAD includes a composite of available NEXRAD radar
imagery across the 48 states. Regional NEXRAD is a composite of available
NEXRAD radar imagery in a local area, showing a more detailed image
than CONUS NEXRAD. FIS-B weather data reception requires line-of-site
communication between the receiver and the ADS-B ground station. Incomplete
Regional and/or CONUS NEXRAD imagery displayed on the MAP and FIS-B
Weather Pages of the affected products is an indicator of poor FIS-B reception.
Affected Areas
Any area in the continental United States (CONUS) or Alaska where the
distance from ADS-B ground stations, or the combined effect of distance and
low altitude, is sufficiently great may cause poor reception. A good source of
information for ground station coverage can be found at:
http://www.faa.gov/
Reception will improve in some affected areas as the FAA completes the
NextGen ADS-B ground station infrastructure. However, due to line-of-sight
broadcast characteristics, operators with properly installed and functioning
equipment may still receive incomplete FIS-B data when signal reception is
limited by the distance from ground stations combined with a low altitude.
4-108
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.9.5
NEXRAD Weather Setup
Foreword
1) While viewing the FIS-B weather page, press the Menu key.
2) With the Weather Setup selection highlighted, press ENT.
Weather Page Map Orientation
2) With the “Map Orientation” option active, turn the small MFD knob to change
the highlighted value.
Sec 2
PFD
The Orientation option sets the orientation of the Wx Data Link Map pages.
1) While viewing the FIS-B Weather Map 1, 2, or 3 of the Wx page group, press
the MENU key. With “Weather Setup” highlighted, press ENT.
Sec 1
System
4.9.5.1
Sec 3
MFD
3) Press ENT to accept the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-109
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Appendix A
4) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 8
Glossary
3) Press ENT to accept the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 7
Symbols
2) The NEXRAD Data Viewing Range value will be highlighted. Turn the small
MFD knob to highlight the desired value.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
4.9.5.2
NEXRAD Data Viewing Range
The NEXRAD Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range
where at and below the selected value NEXRAD weather products will be shown
on the selected MFD FIS-B Weather Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
NEXRAD weather data will not be shown. Where a value (such as 250 NM) is
selected, NEXRAD data will be shown at map ranges of that value (250 NM)
and lower.
1) While viewing a FIS-B Weather Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
4) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 4-89 Weather Page Map Orientation
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
NEXRAD Legend
The NEXRAD Legend selection provides the option of displaying an
abbreviated version of the NEXRAD legend in the top right region of the MFD.
The full legend is available by pressing the LEGEND soft key.
1) While viewing a FIS-B Weather Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
2) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the NEXRAD Legend value.
3) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight Off or On. Press ENT to accept the
displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
4) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
4.9.5.3
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-90 FIS-B NEXRAD Precipitation and Legend
4-110
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.9.5.4
NEXRAD Source
Foreword
Selecting NEXRAD in the FIS-B Weather Menu
1) While viewing the FIS-B weather page, press the Menu key.
2) With the Weather Setup selection highlighted, press ENT.
Sec 3
MFD
Continental US NEXRAD (CONUS)
The Display CONUS NEXRAD selection shows NEXRAD radar information
for the entire continental United States. CONUS NEXRAD data is updated every
15 minutes.
Sec 2
PFD
4) Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired Source option and press ENT.
Sec 1
System
3) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the NEXRAD Data Viewing Range Source
option.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Figure 4-91 FIS-B CONUS NEXRAD
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-111
The Regional NEXRAD selection shows available regional NEXRAD radar
information from reporting ground stations within 500 NM of the aircraft
location.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Regional NEXRAD
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-92 FIS-B Regional NEXRAD
4-112
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Combined NEXRAD
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Regional NEXRAD data and CONUS NEXRAD data are shown together. The
two types of NEXRAD are separated by a white stippled border. This boundary
is updated whenever new Regional or CONUS NEXRAD data is received. The
radius of the boundary is fixed at 150 NM.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
CONUS Data Area
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Regional Boundary
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-93 FIS-B Combined NEXRAD
SIGMETs and AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-113
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Appendix A
When enabled, SIGMET/AIRMETs advise the pilot of potentially hazardous
weather to all aircraft. SIGMET/AIRMET data covers icing, turbulence, dust,
and volcanic ash as issued by the National Weather Service. The update rate is
every 12 minutes.
Sec 8
Glossary
SIGMETs
(SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs
(AIRmen’s METeorological Information) are broadcast for potentially hazardous
weather considered of importance to aircraft. A Convective SIGMET is issued
for hazardous convective weather. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather
condition occurring at a localized geographical position.
Sec 7
Symbols
4.9.5.5
Foreword
Cursor Location
Turbulence Line
Sec 1
System
Product Age
Cursor On AIRMET/SIGMET Line
Sec 2
PFD
Surface Winds Line
Figure 4-94 FIS-B - AIRMETs/SIGMETs
The SIGMET/AIRMET Viewing Range option allows you to select the
map range where at and below that value SIGMET/AIRMET products will be
shown on the selected MFD FIS-B Weather Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off
is selected, SIGMET/AIRMET will not be shown. For a value selected (such as,
150 NM), SIGMET/AIRMET data will be shown at map ranges of that value
(150 NM), and lower.
1) While viewing a FIS-B Weather Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
SIGMET/AIRMET (SIG/AIR) Viewing Range
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
IFR and Mountain Obscured Line
2) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the SIG/AIR Viewing Range value.
3) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
4) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
4-114
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Viewing Textual SIGMETs/AIRMETs
Sec 1
System
2) The Waypoint Information page for that line will now be shown. Press the WX
soft key to view weather information.
Foreword
Textual SIGMET/AIRMETs can be viewed by selecting an SIGMET/AIRMET
line on the Map or Weather (WX) pages.
1) While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight a SIGMET/AIRMET line. Press ENT.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-95 FIS-B AIRMETs/SIGMETs Detail and Legend
When enabled, the following AIRMETs are available for display:
Sec 8
Glossary
• Icing
• Turbulence
Appendix A
• IFR conditions
• Mountain obscuration
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Appendix B
Index
• Surface winds
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-115
AIREP/PIREP
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) provide timely weather information for a
particular route of flight. When significant weather conditions are reported or
forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs. A
PIREP may contain non-forecast adverse weather conditions, such as low inflight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are issued
as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
1) While viewing a FIS-B Weather Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
2) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the PIREPS Viewing Range value.
3) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
4) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Product Age
Cursor Location
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.9.5.6
Selected PIREP
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
PIREP Detail
Figure 4-96 FIS-B AIREPs/PIREPs
4-116
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Viewing Textual AIREPs/PIREPs
Sec 1
System
2) Press ENT or the the small MFD knob to return to the Weather page.
Foreword
Textual AIREPs/PIREPs can be viewed by selecting an AIREP/PIREP on the
Map or Weather (WX) pages.
1) While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight a AIREP/PIREP. Press ENT.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-97 FIS-B AIREPs/PIREPs Detail and Legend
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-117
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure reported for METARs is given in hectopascals
(hPa), except in the United States, where it is reported in inches of mercury
(in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed aviation
database service area.
METAR (METeorological Aerodrome Report), known as an Aviation Routine
Weather Report, is the standard format for current weather observations.
METARs are updated hourly and are considered current. METARs typically
contain information about the temperature, dew point, wind, precipitation,
cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure. They can also
contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical data.
METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
Cursor Location
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Foreword
METARs
Sec 1
System
4.9.5.7
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Selected METAR (VFR)
Figure 4-98 FIS-B Weather - Graphic METARs
METAR Viewing Range
The METAR Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where
at and below that value METAR weather products will be shown on the selected
MFD FIS-B Weather Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, METARs will
not be shown. For a value (such as 150 NM) selected, METAR data will be
shown at map ranges of that value (150 NM), and lower.
4-118
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
2) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the METAR Data Viewing Range value.
Sec 2
PFD
4) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 1
System
3) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Foreword
1) While viewing a FIS-B Weather Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
Viewing Textual METARs
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
2) The Waypoint Information page for that airport will now be shown. Press the
WX soft key to view weather information for the waypoint.
Sec 3
MFD
Textual METARs can be viewed by selecting an airport on the Map or Weather
(WX) pages.
1) While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight an airport with a METAR flag. Press ENT.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
Figure 4-99 FIS-B Weather - Textual METARs
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-119
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-100 FIS-B Weather - Winds Aloft Legend
The Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map
range where at and below that value Winds Aloft weather products will appear
on the selected MFD FIS-B Weather Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
Winds Aloft will not be shown. For the value (such as 150 NM) selected, Winds
Aloft data will be shown at map ranges of that value (such as 150 NM), and
lower.
1) While viewing a FIS-B Weather Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
2) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range
value.
3) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
4) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Winds Aloft
Winds Aloft data shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface
and at selected altitudes. Altitudes can be selected in 3000 foot increments from
the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL by pressing the WX Alt Dn or WX Alt Up
soft keys.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.9.5.8
4-120
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.9.5.9
FIS-B TFRs
Foreword
Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) provide detailed information for local
short term restrictions.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Select TFR Outline
To View Details
TFR Detail
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Appendix A
2) Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value.
3) Press ENT to accept the displayed value.
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-121
Appendix B
Index
4) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the FIS-B Weather Map page.
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 8
Glossary
1) While viewing a FIS-B Weather Map page of the WX page group, turn the large
MFD knob to highlight the TFR Data Viewing Range option.
Sec 7
Symbols
The Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) viewing range option selects
whether TFR information is shown on the FIS-B Weather Map. TFR information
will be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, the
information will not be shown. For the value (such as 500 NM) selected, TFR
information will be shown at map ranges of that value (500 NM), and lower.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-101 FIS-B Weather - TFRs
Textual TFRs can be viewed by selecting a TFR outline on the Weather (WX)
pages.
1) While viewing a Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to move
the cursor to highlight a TFR outline (yellow circle). Press ENT.
2) A summary of the TFR will be shown and the first TFR will be highlighted. In
the case of multiple TFRs, turn the small or large MFD knobs to highlight the
desired TFR.
3) Press the VIEW TEXT soft key to view the full TFR text.
4) Press ENT to return to the Weather page.
Figure 4-102 FIS-B Weather - Textual TFRs and Legend
4.9.6
FIS-B Product Times
The weather product expiration time is shown in the following table. It does not
represent the rate at which weather data is updated or new content is received by
the Data Link Receiver.
Weather Product
CONUS NEXRAD
SIGMETs / AIRMETs
METARs
Winds Aloft
PIREPS
NOTAMs/TFRs
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
60
60
90
90
90
60
Table 4-18 FIS-B Weather Data Timing
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Viewing Textual TFRs
4-122
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
4.10
Stormscope
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
For lightning display interpretation, study the examples in the WX-500
Pilot’s Guide that are designed to help you relate the cell or strike patterns shown
on the display to the size and location of thunderstorms that may be near your
aircraft.
Sec 1
System
The WX-500 StormScope Weather Mapping Sensor is a passive weather
avoidance system that detects electrical discharges associated with thunderstorms
within a 200 NM radius of the aircraft. StormScope measures relative bearing
and distance of thunderstorm-related electrical activity and reports the
information to the display. Interfaces are currently only available for the WX500 StormScope System.
Foreword
NOTE: Refer to the WX-500 Pilot’s Guide for a detailed description of the
WX-500 StormScope.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Figure 4-103 Stormscope
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-123
Symbol
Time Since Strike (Seconds)
Foreword
Less than 6
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Less than 60
Less than 120
Less than 180
Table 4-18 Stormscope Symbols
Mode
Sec 3
MFD
The Mode selection allows you to select the display of storm cells or strikes.
View
The Mode selection allows you to select 360° or Arc views.
Clearing the StormScope® Page
NOTE: When Heading is not available (N/A), the pilot must clear the strikes
after each turn.
Appendix B
Index
2) Lightning strikes will be cleared from the display and the Rate value will be
reset.
Appendix A
Routinely clearing the StormScope Page of all discharge points is a good
way to determine if a storm is building or dissipating. In a building storm
discharge points reappear faster and in larger numbers. In a dissipating storm
discharge points appear slower and in smaller numbers.
1) While viewing the Weather StormScope page, press the Clear key to clear
lightning strikes.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: Cell mode uses a clustering program to identify clusters of electrical
activity that indicate cells. Cell mode is most useful during periods of heavy
storm activity. Displaying cell data during these periods frees the user
from sifting through a screen full of discharge points and helps to better
determine where the storm cells are located.
4-124
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
5
ADDITIONAL FEATURES (OPTIONAL)
Sec 2
PFD
Additional features of the GDU 620 include the following:
Sec 1
System
NOTE: ChartView is an optional feature that requires enablement by a
Garmin dealer.
Foreword
NOTE: The availability of SafeTaxi, ChartView, or FliteCharts in electronic
form may not preclude the requirement to carry paper charts aboard the
aircraft. See the AFMS for more information.
• ChartView and FliteCharts® electronic charts
• SafeTaxi® diagrams
Sec 3
MFD
• Sirius XM Satellite Radio entertainment
• XM WX Satellite Weather (covered in Section 4.7)
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• Traffic (covered in Sections 4.5 and 4.6)
• Garmin Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT™)
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
The optional Sirius XM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the
GDL 69A Data Link Receiver handles more than 170 channels of music, news,
and sports. Sirius XM Satellite Radio offers more entertainment choices and
longer range coverage than commercial broadcast stations.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information
at more than 700 airports in the United States. By decreasing the range on an
airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the airport layout
can be seen.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
The optional ChartView and FliteCharts provide on-board electronic terminal
procedures charts. Electronic charts offer the convenience of rapid access to
essential information. Either ChartView or FliteCharts may be configured in the
system.
XM WX Satellite Weather is an optional service that provides the ability to
display graphic weather data overlaid on the MFD Nav Map and Weather Data
Link pages.
Appendix A
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TAS or TIS traffic data in relation to
the aircraft’s current position and altitude. The Traffic option is designed to assist
in detection and avoidance of other aircraft.
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-1
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
5.1
Viewing FliteCharts and ChartView
When the Chart function is available, charts will be shown on the third page
of the Flight Plan page group. The chart page will default to the nearest airport
if no flight plan or destination airport is present. While you are on the ground,
the displayed charts will default to the current airport location regardless of
flight plan.
Both ChartView and FliteCharts may be geo-referenced. The icon will have
an “x” through it the selected chart does not support geo-referencing.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
The optional Garmin Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT™) is a visual
enhancement to the G500H. SVT is displayed as a forward-looking display of
the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. SVT information is shown
on the primary flight display (PFD).
Sec 5
Additional
Features
NOTE: The availability of SafeTaxi, ChartView, or FliteCharts in electronic
form may not preclude the requirement to carry paper charts aboard the
aircraft. See the AFMS for more information.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
NOTE: The Chart feature provides a digital representation of a paper
chart and provides no vertical or lateral course guidance. Flight Plan and
Procedures are separate from Charts, and do provide vertical and lateral
course guidance for the loaded route or procedure shown on the Flight
Plan page. The term “Chart Unavailable” means that the chart cannot be
viewed on the Charts due to either a chart not being published, or an error
in the Chart database, but does not preclude its availability or inclusion of
the procedure in the Flight Plan or Procedures portion of the system. The
absence of a chart for a particular Departure, Arrival, or Approach does
not preclude its availability or inclusion in the Flight Plan. The absence of
a particular Departure, Arrival, or Approach under the Flight Plan does not
preclude the ability to view the Chart.
Appendix B
Index
NOTE: Do not use SafeTaxi or Chartview functions as the basis for ground
maneuvering. SafeTaxi and Chartview functions do not comply with the
requirements of AC 20-159 and are not qualified to be used as an airport
moving map display (AMMD). SafeTaxi and Chartview are to be used by
the flight crew to orient themselves on the airport surface to improve pilot
situational awareness during ground operations.
5-2
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
NOTE: The chart for the destination airport or loaded approach will
automatically be selected.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 5-1 ChartView Chart Page
Figure 5-2 FliteChart Chart Page
1) Turn the large MFD knob to the Flight Plan (FPL) page group.
5.1.1
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2) Turn the small MFD knob to the Charts page.
ChartView (Optional)
• Departure Procedures (DP)
Appendix B
Index
• Approaches
• Airport Diagrams
• Chart NOTAMs
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Appendix A
• Arrivals (STAR)
Sec 8
Glossary
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc.
ChartView is an optional feature that requires enablement by a Garmin dealer.
Available data includes:
Sec 7
Symbols
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures
charts. The charts are displayed in full color with high-resolution. The MFD
depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the plan view of
approach charts and on airport diagrams.
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-3
The ChartView database is revised every 14 days. Charts are still viewable
during a period that extends from the cycle expiration date to the disables date.
ChartView is disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is no longer available
for viewing upon reaching the disable date. When turning on the GDU 620, the
Power-up Page indicates any of nine different possible criteria for ChartView
availability. See the table below for the various ChartView Power-up Page
displays and the definition of each.
5.1.2
FliteCharts®
FliteCharts® resemble the paper version of FAA-published terminal procedures
charts. FliteChart data may also be provided by sources other than the FAA. The
charts are displayed with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts. The
MFD FliteCharts depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the
plan view of approach charts.
FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. Available data
includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• Approaches
• Airport Diagrams (not geo-referenced)
Cycle Number and Revision
FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days. Charts are still viewable during
a period that extends from the cycle expiration date to the disables date.
FliteCharts is disabled 180 days after the expiration date and are no longer
available for viewing upon reaching the disables date. When turning on the GDU
620, the Power-up page indicates any of five different possible criteria for chart
availability. These indications are whether the databases are not configured, not
available, current, out of date, or disabled. See the previous table for the various
FliteCharts Power-up page displays and the definition of each.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Cycle Number and Revision
5-4
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
5.1.3
Chart Database Type
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Select the DBASE soft key for scrolling through the database information.
Scroll through the database with the MFD knob or ENT key.
1) Turn the large MFD knob to select AUX.
2) Press the DB ACTV key to view the databases.
3) Press the small MFD knob and then turn the small or large MFD knobs to
highlight Chart Type. The field will show Not Available, ChartView, or FliteCharts.
Foreword
Determining Chart Database Type, Coverage,
and Currency
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 5-3 ChartView Database Information
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 5-4 FliteChart Database Information
Sec 7
Symbols
Chart Coverage
The Chart databases cover the area that was selecting during the download
process. FliteCharts will note the region covered by the installed chart database;
ChartView does not.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-5
Database is active.
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Chart Currency
The date currency of the installed chart databases are shown both during
power-up and on the AUX - System Status page.
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Database’s effective date is in
the future. [2]
Database’s effective date is the
current day. [1] [2]
Current date is unknown (e.g.,
no GPS fix yet).
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Database’s expiration date is the
current day. [1]
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Database’s expiration date has
passed. Expired notes that the
database expired less than 70
days ago, but may still be used.
Database’s disable data has
passed. Disabled notes that the
database expired more than
70 days ago and is no longer
available for use.
System is verifying database
when new cycle is installed.
Database verification failed.
Appendix A
No database is installed.
Appendix B
Index
Blank Line. GDU 620 system
is not configured for any
chart data. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for
configuration.
Table 5-1 Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
5-6
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
2. ChartView does not have “Effective” dates.
Selecting a Chart
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
5.1.4.1
Selecting FliteCharts or ChartView
When configured during installation and when both chart types are available,
you can select which chart type will be used. Only one chart type can be used
at a time.
Sec 2
PFD
The G500/600 will only allow the pilot to select the chart type in normal
mode if it is configured for ChartView. When in-air, the pilot cannot select the
field to change the chart source, and a small message is displayed underneath the
Chart Type line that reads “Chart Type can only be changed when on ground”.
The ability to select a chart type is absent from normal mode if configured for
FliteCharts.
Sec 1
System
5.1.4
Foreword
1. When the effective or expiration date is the current day, the following
message is displayed at the bottom of the page: “Check local rules for
database effective times.”
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Chart Type sections.
Turn the small MFD knob to select ChartView or FliteCharts.
Press the ENT key to save the selected value.
Changing chart type requires a restart of the unit. With OK selected, press the
ENT key to restart the unit and change to the selected chart type.
Sec 7
Symbols
1)
2)
3)
4)
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 5-5 Chart NOTAM
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
Figure 5-6 Changing Chart Type
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-7
Selecting a New Chart by FPL, NRST, or RECENT
You may select other charts to display based on your flight plan (FPL), charts
of the nearest airport (NRST), or your most recently selected airports (RECENT).
Figure 5-7 Chart Category Selection
1) While viewing the Charts page of the FPL page group, press the SELECT soft
key.
2) Turn the small MFD knob counterclockwise to show FPL, NRST, or RECENT.
3) Turn the large MFD knob to select the desired identifier and then press ENT.
5.1.4.3
Selecting a Chart Manually
A chart for a different airport may be chosen by selecting the identifier for
the desired airport.
Airport Identifier Selection
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.1.4.2
Figure 5-8 Airport Identifier Selection
5-8
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
2) Use the small MFD knob to change the character.
Foreword
1) While viewing the Charts page of the FPL page group, press the SELECT soft
key to change the airport.
3) Use the large MFD knob to move the cursor to highlight a character.
Sec 1
System
4) Press ENT to accept the selected airport.
5.1.4.4
Chart Auto-Selection
Sec 3
MFD
NOTE: The chart for the destination airport or loaded approach will
automatically be selected.
Sec 2
PFD
The charts page will automatically select a chart to display when the page is
opened.
• While on the ground, the nearest airport diagram will be displayed.
• If an approach is loaded in the selected GPS navigator, the chart for that
approach will be displayed. In some cases, the pilot may be prompted to
select the correct chart from a list of possible matches.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• If an approach is not loaded, the airport diagram for the destination
airport will be displayed.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• The aircraft takes off or lands
2) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the field to the right of the airport
identifier.
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-9
Appendix B
Index
1) While viewing the Charts page of the FPL page group, press the SELECT soft
key to activate chart selection.
Appendix A
• A new or different approach is loaded
Sec 8
Glossary
When the pilot has manually selected a chart to display, a different chart will
not be automatically selected until one of the following events occurs:
Sec 7
Symbols
NOTE: Automatic chart selection only occurs when the charts page is
opened. For example, if a new approach is loaded while the charts page is
open, a different MFD page must be selected and the charts page re-opened
for the new approach chart to be automatically displayed.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• If no destination airport exists, the nearest airport diagram will be
displayed.
Figure 5-9 Activate Chart Selection for the Current Airport (ChartView shown)
4)
Press ENT to accept and view the selected chart.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3) Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired chart.
5-10
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 5-10 Selected Chart for the Current Airport (ChartView shown)
Using Charts
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
More detail on the displayed chart can be viewed by zooming in with the
Range keys and moving the chart around with pan mode. The Detail soft key
allows access to more details for the currently displayed chart.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
5.1.5
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-11
Chart Zooming and Panning
Chart and Panning allows viewing charts closer to examine details.
NOTE: Panning mode is indicated by the presence of scroll bars.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.1.5.1
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Vertical Scroll Bar
Figure 5-11 Zooming and Panning Around a Chart
1) While viewing the Charts page of the FPL page group, press the RNG (Range)
keys to zoom in and out.
2) After zooming in, you may only see part of the chart. Press the small MFD knob
to enter Pan mode and activate scroll bars on the edges of the chart. Turn the
large and small MFD knobs to move around the chart.
3) Press the small MFD knob to cancel the scroll bars and exit panning.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Horizontal Scroll Bar
5-12
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
5.1.5.2
Viewing Chart Details in ChartView
NOTE: The chart for the destination airport or loaded approach will
automatically be selected.
Foreword
NOTE: Chart details are only available for instrument approach procedure
charts. Chart details are not available for airport diagrams or SID/STAR
charts.
Sec 1
System
1) Press the Detail key to view detailed views of the current chart. The Detail key
is only available with ChartView.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 5-12 Selected Chart for the Current Airport (ChartView shown)
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-13
Press the Header, Plan, Profile, or Minimums keys to view detailed
sections for the chart for those topics. An aircraft icon will show in the lower
right corner of the display if your aircraft is in the chart area.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2)
3) Press the Back key to return to the view of the full chart.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 5-13 Detail of the Selected Chart (Header Shown)
5-14
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 1
System
2) With the Minimums Source highlighted, select the Altitude Minimums Alerter
source with small MFD knob.
Foreword
5.1.5.3
Setting the Altitude Minimums Alerter
1) While viewing the Charts Page of the FPL page group, press the Menu key.
With the Set Minimums item highlighted, press ENT.
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 5-14 Minimums Source Selection
Sec 3
MFD
3) Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Altitude Minimums value. Turn the
large and small MFD knobs to change the Altitude Minimums value and then
press ENT to activate the selected value.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 5-15 Minimums Altitude Selection
Sec 8
Glossary
NOTE: If you highlight the Minimums Altitude field on the FPL page and
press the CLR key, it will turn the minimums functionality off.
Sec 7
Symbols
In dual installations, the minimums alerting altitude value may be set from
either GDU 620 and will be synchronized on both units.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft
reaches 150 feet above the MDA. The Minimum altitude will be available in the
Altitude Alerter.
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-15
Foreword
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
5.1.5.4
Viewing Chart NOTAMs
If an active NOTAM (Notice to Airmen) exists for the selected chart, the
NOTAM soft key will be available. Press the NOTAM soft key to view the
NOTAM or select View NOTAMs from the Chart Options Menu.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 5-16 Chart NOTAM
5-16
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
5.1.5.5
Day/Night View
Sec 1
System
When AUTO is selected, it allows the user to set a threshold for the transition
between the Day and Night color schemes.
Foreword
The Chart pages can be displayed on a white or black background for day or
night viewing. The Day View offers a better presentation in a bright environment.
The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark environment. .
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 5-17 Chart Color Scheme Auto Selection and Aux Display Brightness
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
NOTE: Once an adjustment is made to the percentage field in Auto mode,
the chart must be redrawn (zoomed in or out, or another chart selected)
before the switch from Day to Night is seen.
Sec 3
MFD
The threshold is compared to the Display Brightness Level that is displayed
on the Aux System Setup page. If the color scheme percentage on the Chart
Setup page is less than the display brightness percentage selected on the Aux
System Setup page, then the Chart AUTO Color Scheme will draw the chart as
though the NIGHT scheme were selected. Otherwise, the AUTO scheme will
draw the chart as though the DAY scheme were selected.
1) In the FPL page group, turn the small MFD knob to reach the Charts page.
2) Press MENU to display the Options menu.
3) Press ENT to go to Chart Setup. The Color Scheme option will be highlighted.
4) Turn the small MFD knob to select Day - AUTO - Night.
5) If Auto is selected, turn the large MFD knob CW to the percentage value and
turn the small MFD knob to change the value.
6) Press the small MFD knob or the ENT key to save the selected value and return
to the Charts page.
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-17
SafeTaxi®
SafeTaxi® is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when zooming
in on airports at close range. The airport display on the map reveals runways
with numbers, taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots,
and airport landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other
prominent features. Resolution is greater at lower map ranges. When the aircraft
location is within the screen boundary, including within SafeTaxi ranges, an
aircraft symbol is shown on any of the navigation map views for enhanced
position awareness.
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting
taxiways and runways, and/or complex ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are
outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are
defined with a magenta circle or outline around the region of possible confusion.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.2
Taxiway
Identification
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Hot Spot
Outline
DCLTR Soft Key
Removes Taxiway
Markings
Figure 5-18 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
NOTE: Do not use SafeTaxi or Chartview functions as the basis for ground
maneuvering. SafeTaxi and Chartview functions do not comply with the
requirements of AC 20-159 and are not qualified to be used as an airport
moving map display (AMMD). SafeTaxi and Chartview are to be used by
the flight crew to orient themselves on the airport surface to improve pilot
situational awareness during ground operations.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Aircraft
position
5-18
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
5.2.1
Using SafeTaxi®
• VOR Information Page
• Airport Information Page
• User Waypoint Information Page
Sec 2
PFD
• Intersection Information Page
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-19
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Appendix A
2) Turn the MFD knobs to move the cursor on the Hot Spot border or into the Hot
Spot area and then press the ENT key.
Sec 8
Glossary
Hot Spots can contain more information about the area that can be displayed
when selected.
1) While viewing the Hot Spot area on the Navigation Map page, press the small
MFD knob to activate the cursor.
Sec 7
Symbols
Hot Spot Information
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
5.2.1.2
Sec 5
Additional
Features
The DCLTR soft key (declutter) label advances to DCLTR-1, DCLTR -2, and
DCLTR-3 each time the soft key is selected for easy recognition of decluttering
level. Selecting the DCLTR soft key removes the taxiway markings and airport
feature labels. Selecting the DCLTR-1 soft key removes VOR station ID, the VOR
symbol, and intersection names if within the airport plan view. Selecting the
DCLTR-2 soft key removes the airport runway layout, unless the airport in view
is part of an active route structure. Pressing the DCLTR-3 soft key cycles back
to the original map detail. With Auto-Zoom enabled, the map will automatically
zoom to 1 NM and DCLTR-0 upon landing so SafeTaxi can be viewed. Refer to
Map Declutter Levels in the Navigation Map Section.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Decluttering
Sec 3
MFD
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to
taxiways, runways, and airport features. When panning over the airport, features
such as runway holding lines and taxiways are shown.
5.2.1.1
Sec 1
System
• Weather Datalink Page
Foreword
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi®
airport layout within the maximum configured range. The following is a list of
pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
• Navigation Map Page
• NDB Information Page
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Hot spot
Name
Figure 5-19 SafeTaxi Hot Spot Information
3. An information window will be shown on the MFD. After viewing, press the
small MFD knob, CLR, or ENT keys to remove the information window. Press
the small MFD knob again to cancel the cursor.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Aircraft Symbol Cursor Hot spot
Border
5-20
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
5.2.2
SafeTaxi® Cycle Number and Revision
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
The SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days. SafeTaxi is always available
for use after the expiration date. When turning on the GDU 620, the Power-up
Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or not available.
The Power-up Page shows the SafeTaxi database is current when the “SafeTaxi
Expires” date is shown in white. When the SafeTaxi cycle has expired, the
“SafeTaxi Expires” date appears in yellow. The message “SafeTaxi: N/A” appears
in white if no SafeTaxi data is available on the database card.
Sec 3
MFD
SafeTaxi Database Status
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 5-20 Power-up Page, SafeTaxi Database
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
The SafeTaxi Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the
database cycle can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. SafeTaxi
information appears in white and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in
white when data is current and in yellow when the current date is before the
effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in white when data is current and in
yellow when expired. SafeTaxi REGION NOT AVAILABLE appears in white if
SafeTaxi data is not available on the database card. Expired SafeTaxi data is never
disabled.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-21
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.3
Sirius XM Satellite Radio Entertainment
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about XM
WX Satellite Weather products.
The optional Sirius XM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A
Data Link Receiver is available for the pilot’s and passengers’ enjoyment. The
GDL 69A can receive Sirius XM Satellite Radio entertainment services at any
altitude throughout the Continental U.S. Entertainment audio is not available
on the GDL 69 Data Link Receiver.
Sirius XM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances
without having to constantly search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites,
coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions. Sirius XM Satellite Radio services
are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
http://www.garmin.com/xm/.
5.3.1
Activating Sirius XM Satellite Radio Services
The service is activated by providing Sirius XM Satellite Radio with either
one or two coded IDs, depending on the equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID
or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to Sirius XM Satellite Radio to
activate the entertainment subscription. The Sirius XM Satellite Radio Activation
Instructions are included with the unit (also available at www.garmin.com, P/N
190-00355-04).
Sirius XM Satellite Radio and XM WX Satellite Weather subscriptions are
sold separately. It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather
service subscriptions with the GDL 69A. Either or both services can be activated.
Sirius XM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an activation
signal that, when received by the GDL 69A, allows it to play entertainment
programming.
These IDs are located:
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• On the XM Information Page on the MFD
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be
located.
5-22
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
If XM WX Satellite weather services have not been activated, the weather
product names will be displayed in gray (see below) on the XM Information
Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of
the Weather Data Link Page (Map Page Group). The Service Class refers to the
groupings of weather products available for subscription.
Foreword
NOTE: The LOCK soft key on the XM Information Page (Auxiliary Page
Group) is used to save GDL 69A activation data when the Sirius XM
Satellite Radio services are initially set up. It is not used during normal
Sirius XM Satellite Radio operation, but there should be no adverse effects
if inadvertently selected during flight. Refer to the GDL 69/69A Sirius XM
Satellite Radio Activation Instructions (190-00355-04, Rev G, or later) for
further information.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-23
Sirius XM Satellite Radio Information
The Aux mode XM Information page displays information about the Sirius
XM Satellite radios, service class, and products when the GDL 69/69A is installed
and the Sirius XM Satellite Radio service is activated. The Data and Audio radios
have separate Identification Numbers. The Service Class determines the features
that are available. Products that are not part of the subscription are displayed in
gray. Products that are part of the active subscription, but are waiting to receive
data are white. Products that are part of the active subscription and have data
are green.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.3.2
1) In the AUX page group, turn the small MFD knob to display Sirius XM Satellite
Radio Information.
2) The LOCK soft key is used to “lock” your XM subscription activation. This is
only used for the initial subscription or to make a change.
NOTE: Refer to the GDL 69/69A Sirius XM Satellite Radio Activation
Instructions (190-00355-04, Rev G, or later) for further information.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 5-21 Sirius XM Satellite Radio Information
5-24
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
5.3.3
Sirius XM Satellite Radio Entertainment Radio
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Active Channel
Window
Sec 2
PFD
2) Turn the small MFD knob to the XM Radio page.
Sec 1
System
The information on the Sirius XM Satellite Radio display is composed of
four areas: the Active Channel, Available Channels, Category of the highlighted
channel, and the Volume setting. The Active Channel window shows the Channel
Name and Number, Artist, Song Title, and Category.
1) Turn the large MFD knob to Aux Mode.
Foreword
Audio entertainment is available through the Sirius XM Satellite Radio Service
when activated in the optional installation of the GDL 69A. The GDU 620 serves
as the display and control head for your remotely mounted GDL 69A. Sirius XM
Satellite Radio allows you to enjoy a variety of radio programming over long
distances without having to constantly search for new stations. Based on signal
from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions. When enabled,
the Sirius XM Satellite Radio audio entertainment is accessible in Aux page
group.
Channel Scroll Bar
Sec 7
Symbols
Selected Channel
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Available Channel
Window
Volume Bar Graph
Page Name
Appendix A
Soft Keys
Sec 8
Glossary
Category Window
Figure 5-22 Sirius XM Satellite Radio
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-25
Channel Categories
The Category window displays the currently selected category of audio.
Categories of channels, such as Jazz, Rock, or News, can be selected to list the
available channels for a type of music or other contents.
1) While viewing the XM Radio page of the AUX page group, press the CATGRY
soft key to activate Category selection.
2) Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired category. When the MFD knob
is turned to select a category, the soft keys will not be shown.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.3.3.1
Figure 5-23 XM Category List
Figure 5-24 XM Category Soft Keys
3) Press ENT to display the list of channels for the highlighted category in the
Channels window.
4) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing.
OR
1) Press CATGRY and then the CAT + or CAT – soft keys to increment up or
down one category at a time.
2) Press ALL to show the channels for all categories. Use the large and small MFD
knobs to select desired channel.
3) Press ENT to save the selection or press the small MFD knob to cancel
selection.
5-26
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 1
System
Active Channel Number
Artist Name
Category
Foreword
5.3.3.2
Selecting a Sirius XM Satellite Radio Channel
The Channel feature is used to navigate through the channels in the selected
category.
Active Channel Name
Song Title
Sec 2
PFD
New Selected Channel
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2) Press ENT to make the highlighted channel the Active Channel.
6) Press ENT to save the selection or press the small MFD knob to cancel
selection.
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-27
Appendix B
Index
5) Press CHNL and then the DIR CH soft key to directly select a channel in the
active category. Use the large and small MFD knobs to select desired channel.
Appendix A
OR
4) Press CHNL and then the CH + or CH – soft keys to increment up or down one
channel at a time in the active category.
OR
Sec 8
Glossary
3) Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing.
Sec 7
Symbols
NOTE: A delay of several seconds may occur when selecting a channel.
The listed title may end before the radio begins playing the current Active
Channel material.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
1) While viewing the XM Radio page of the AUX page group, press the small MFD
knob and then turn the small MFD knob to select the desired channel.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 5-25 XM Channel Selection
Sirius XM Satellite Radio Volume
The Volume control allows you to set the audio volume level, as well as mute
the audio.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.3.3.3
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Volume Bar Graph
Volume Soft Key Label
Figure 5-26 XM Radio Volume Setting
1) While viewing the XM Radio page of the AUX page group, press the VOL soft
key.
2) Press the VOL + or VOL – soft keys, or turn the small MFD knob, to adjust the
radio volume.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Volume Bar Graph
Volume Soft Key Labels
Figure 5-27 XM Radio Volume Controls
3) Press MUTE to mute the radio volume.
4) Press MUTE again or the VOL + or VOL – soft keys to unmute the radio
volume.
5-28
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
5.3.3.4
Sirius XM Satellite Radio Channel Presets
Foreword
The PRESET soft key allows you to store the Active Channel into a selected
preset position for easy later recall. A delay of several seconds can occur when
setting or recalling a preset.
Sec 1
System
Active Channel
Number and Name
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Active Channel
and Song Title
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Feature Tip
Preset Soft Keys
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 5-28 XM Radio Presets
Setting a Preset
2) Press and hold a preset soft key, such as PS1.
Sec 8
Glossary
3) Press the MORE soft key to display the next series of presets.
Recalling a Preset
2) Press the preset soft key for the desired stored channel, such as PS1.
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Appendix B
Index
3) Press the MORE soft key to display the next series of presets.
Appendix A
1) While viewing the XM Radio page of the AUX page group, press the PRESETS
soft key.
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 7
Symbols
1) While viewing the XM Radio page of the AUX page group, you may set a preset
for the Active Channel. Press the PRESETS soft key.
5-29
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.3.4
GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver
Troubleshooting
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the
possible cause of a failure.
• Ensure the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is
installed has subscribed to Sirius XM Satellite Radio
• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied
to the Data Link Receiver
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the AUX System Status Page for Data Link Receiver (GDL 69/69A) status, serial number,
and software version number. If a failure has been detected in the GDL 69/69A
the status will be marked with a red “X.”
1) Turn the large MFD knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small MFD knob to select the System Status Page (the last page in the
AUX Page Group).
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
• Ensure the Sirius XM Satellite Radio subscription has been activated
GDL 69 Status OK
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
LRU Info Window
Database Window
Scroll Bar for More Items
LRU or DBASE Selection
Figure 5-29 LRU Status Window
5-30
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
5.4
Foreword
Garmin Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT™)
(Optional)
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• Flight Path Marker
Sec 3
MFD
The following SVT enhancements appear on the PFD:
Sec 2
PFD
NOTE: Not all flight directors are supported with SVT enabled. Check your
AFMS to determine if your flight director is supported with SVT enabled.
Sec 1
System
The optional Garmin Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT™) is a visual
enhancement to the G500H. SVT is displayed as a forward-looking display of
the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. SVT information is shown
on the primary flight display (PFD). The depicted imagery is derived from the
aircraft attitude, heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a database of
terrain, obstacles, and other relevant features.
• Horizon Heading Marks
• Traffic Display
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• Airport Signs
• Runway Display
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• Terrain Alerting
• Obstacle Alerting
• Water
Sec 7
Symbols
• Zero-Pitch Line
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-31
NOTE: SVT will become disabled if the databases necessary to display
SVT are unavailable (generating a GDU DB ERR or SVT DISABLED alert) or
AHRS or GPS data is unavailable.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
SVT offers a three-dimensional view of terrain and obstacles. Terrain and/
or obstacles that pose a threat to the aircraft in flight are shaded yellow or red.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 5-30 Synthetic Vision Imagery - PFD
5-32
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
5.4.1
Garmin SVT™ Operation
Foreword
SVT functions are displayed on three levels of soft keys. The PFD soft key
leads into the PFD function soft keys, including synthetic vision. Pressing the
SYN VIS soft key enables synthetic vision and displays the SYN TERR, HRZN
HDG, and APTSIGNS soft keys. The BACK soft key returns to the previous
level of soft keys.
Sec 1
System
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• SYN TERR soft key enables synthetic terrain depiction.
Sec 3
MFD
HRZN and APTSIGNS soft keys are dependent upon the state of the SYN
TERR soft key. When Synthetic Terrain is deactivated, the SYN TERR soft
key appears illuminated while the remaining SVT soft keys are unavailable for
selection and subdued (black with dark-gray characters). If Synthetic Terrain
is deactivated, all other SVT features are also deactivated. With Synthetic
Terrain activated, all other SVT features may be turned on or off at the pilot’s
discretion.
Sec 2
PFD
Garmin SVT™ is activated from the PFD using the soft keys located along
the bottom edge of the display. Pressing the soft keys turn the related function
on or off.
• HRZN HDG soft key enable horizon heading marks and digits.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• APTSIGNS soft key enables airport signposts.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
Figure 5-31 SVT Soft Keys
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-33
5.4.2
NOTE: In some instances, such as temporary loss of GPS signal, the SVT
functionality will be disabled.
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Activating and Deactivating Garmin SVT™
To enable SVT:
1) Press the PFD soft key.
3) Press the SYN TERR soft key to view the SVT display.
When SVT is enabled, the pitch ladder will display a different pitch scale.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
2) Press the SYN VIS soft key.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 5-32 Pitch Scale with SVT Enabled
Figure 5-33 Pitch Scale with SVT Disabled
5-34
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
5.6.3
Garmin SVT™ Features
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Traffic
Flight Path Marker
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Zero-Pitch Line
(ZPL) with Horizon
Heading Marks
Aircraft Symbol
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Synthetic Terrain
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
SVT Soft Keys
NOTE: SVT features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude
deviation information using the CDI, VSI, and VDI presentations.
Flight Path Marker (FPM)
5.4.3.2
Zero-Pitch Line
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-35
Appendix B
Index
The Zero-Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and provides a
reference line by which to judge aircraft attitude with respect to the horizon. It
is not necessarily aligned with the terrain horizon, particularly when the terrain
is sloped or mountainous.
Appendix A
The Flight Path Marker is also known as a Velocity Vector. It is displayed
on the PFD at ground speeds above 30 knots. The FPM depicts approximate
projected path of the aircraft.
Sec 8
Glossary
5.4.3.1
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 5-34 SVT on Primary Flight Display
Horizon Heading
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows compass
headings in 30-degree increments on the Zero-Pitch Line. Horizon heading tick
marks and digits appearing on the zero-pitch line are not visible when they are
behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is activated and
deactivated by pressing the HRZN HDG soft key.
Horizon Heading
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.4.3.3
Figure 5-35 Horizon Heading
Airport Signs
Airports Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and
identification on the synthetic terrain display. When activated, the signs appear
on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 NM from an airport and
disappear at approximately 4.5 NM. Airport signs are shown without the
identifier until the aircraft is approximately 9 NM from the airport. Airport signs
are shown behind the airspeed or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and
deactivated by pressing the APT SIGNS soft key.
NOTE: Heliport signs will not appear on the synthetic terrain display.
Airport Sign with Identifier
(Between 4.5 NM and 9.0 NM)
Airport Sign without Identifier
(Between 9 NM and 15 NM)
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
5.4.3.4
Figure 5-36 Airport Signs
5-36
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
5.4.3.5
Runway Depiction
Sec 1
System
Without a loaded flight plan, a runway is shown as dark gray with the
boundaries of the runway in light gray.
Foreword
Runways are shown on the PFD in various ways. Soft surface runways, such
as grass runways, are depicted in green. Hard surface runways, such as asphalt,
are depicted in gray. Your flight plan will determine how the runway is displayed
on the PFD.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Runway
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Runway
Sec 5
Additional
Features
A runway that is not in a loaded flight plan is shown as dark gray with no
other colors.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 5-37 Depiction of Runway with a Loaded Flight plan
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 5-38 Depiction of Runway Not in Loaded Flight plan
Sec 8
Glossary
A runway that is associated with an approach in the loaded flight plan is
outlined with a white rectangle, with the actual runway, in that rectangle.
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
Runway
Figure 5-39 Depiction of Runway with Loaded Approach
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-37
Traffic
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate respective location as
determined by the related traffic systems. TIS, TAS and ADS-B traffic are all
displayed. Traffic is displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are
getting closer, and smaller when they are further away.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.4.3.6
Traffic on PFD
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Traffic on MFD
Figure 5-40 Traffic Depiction on PFD and MFD
5-38
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
Sec 1
System
5.4.3.7
Obstacles
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic display by two-dimensional tower
or windmill symbols found on the MFD maps and charts. Obstacle symbols
appear in the perspective view with relative height above terrain and distance
from the aircraft.
Obstacle Alert
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Obstacle
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 5-41 Obstacle Depiction on PFD
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Unlike the MFD moving map display, obstacles on the synthetic terrain
display do not change colors based on relative altitude but will be colored to
match any SVT TERRAIN or TAWS Alert from that obstacle. Obstacles greater
than 1000 feet below the aircraft’s altitude are not shown. Obstacles are shown
behind the airspeed and altitude displays.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-39
V-Shaped Lines
Depict PFD Field
of View (angle is
approx. 50°)
Foreword
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
5.4.3.8
Field of View
The PFD Field of View can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page
lateral image. Two dashed lines forming a V-shape in front of the aircraft symbol
on the MFD with an angle of approximately 50º represent the forward horizontal
field of view shown on the PFD.
Figure 5-42 MFD and PFD Field of View Comparison
5-40
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
To configure the Field of View:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map 1 or 2 of the Map Page Group, press the
MENU key to display the PAGE MENU.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 5-43 Page Menu
2) Press the ENT key to bring up the setup page.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Field of View
Appendix A
Figure 5-44 Map Setup Items
3) Turn the large MFD knob to scroll through the options to FIELD OF VIEW.
5) Press the small MFD knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-41
Appendix B
Index
4) Turn the small MFD knob to select On or Off. Press the ENT key to confirm your
selection.
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.4.3.9
Unusual Attitudes
Unusual attitudes are displayed with red chevrons overlaid on the display,
pointing to the direction to fly to correct the unusual attitude condition. The
display shows either a brown or blue band of color at the top or bottom of the
screen to represent earth or sky. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the
horizon during extreme pitch attitudes.
• The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database.
• The terrain database is out of date using an older terrain database card.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Two conditions that inhibit SVT and generate alerts on the PFD:
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Blue Band - Sky Representation
Appendix B
Index
Figure 5-45 Unusual Attitude Display - Blue Band
5-42
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Brown Band - Ground
Representation
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 5-46 Unusual Attitude Display - Brown Band
Blue Band - Sky
Representation
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Terrain
Fills
Display
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
Figure 5-47 Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-43
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
This page intentionally left blank
5-44
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
6.1
Alerts
Foreword
6
Action
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• ADC Altitude
Error Correction is
unavailable.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
ADC1/2 ALT EC
Description
Sec 3
MFD
Alert Message
Sec 2
PFD
The MFD ALERTS page may have two additional soft keys (TRND/ACK
and CAPTURE) which are present when interfaced to an optional ADAS+
Engine Trend Monitor (ETM). Pressing the TRND/ACK soft key is equivalent to
pressing the ETM Trend key for one second. Pressing the CAPTURE soft key is
equivalent to pressing the ETM Trend key for five seconds. Refer to the Airplane
Flight Manual and ADAS+ ETM documentation for the system description and
operating procedures.
Sec 1
System
Alerts are displayed on the MFD and are accessible via the ALERTS MFD
soft key. When a new advisory is present, the ALERTS soft key text changes to
ADVISORY and flashes until the alerts page is viewed.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• The alert is enabled
and the GDC is
reporting that
altitude correction is
unavailable.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
6-1
AHRS1 GPS
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
AHRS1/2 SRVC
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• AHRS1/2 not
receiving any GPS
information.
Action
• Verify navigators are on and have
a GPS signal and are not in selftest mode.
• AHRS1/2 not
receiving backup GPS
information.
AHRS1/2 TAS
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Description
• AHRS1/2 operating • Check AFMS for limitations.
exclusively in no-GPS • Contact your Garmin dealer for
reversionary mode.
service.
• AHRS1/2 using
backup GPS source.
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Alert Message
• Two GPS devices
are configured as
present and AHRS1
is not receiving GPS
data from the backup
(2nd) device.
• AHRS1/2 magnetic- • AHRS magnetic field model should
field model needs
be upgraded.
update.
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
• Appears on ground
service.
only.
• AHRS1/2 not
• Check ADC cable.
receiving true
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
airspeed from ADC.
service.
Appendix A
• Displayed heading
and attitude data is
still valid.
Appendix B
Index
• Additional loss of
GPS data will cause
loss of heading and
attitude data.
6-2
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Alert Message
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
CNFG MODULE
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
• Calibration Data Lost. • Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
• GDU 1-2 airframe
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
configuration settings
service.
disagree.
• GDU configuration
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
module is
service.
inoperative.
Sec 3
MFD
CNFG
MISMATCH
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
Sec 2
PFD
CAL LOST
• ALT key is not available.
Sec 1
System
• The ALT key is
disabled.
ALT NO COMP • No data from one
or more altitude
sensors.
ARINC 429
• ARINC 429
configuration error.
CONFIG
ARINC 708
• ARINC 708
configuration error.
CONFIG
AUD NOT AVAIL • Audio system not
available.
AUD SYS FAIL
• Audio system failure.
Action
Foreword
ALT KEY INOP
Description
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
6-3
DATALINK
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Alert Message
Description
• GDL 88H ADS-B
Failure. Unable to
transmit ADS-B
messages.
Action
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
• GDL 88H ADS-B
fault.
Sec 2
PFD
• ADS-B fault: UAT
receiver.
Sec 3
MFD
• ADS-B fault: 1090
receiver.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• GDL 88H needs
service.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• GDL 88H ADS-B is
not transmitting
position. Check GPS
devices.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• GDL 88H control
panel input fault.
Check transponder
mode.
Sec 7
Symbols
• GDL 88H ADS-B fault.
Pressure altitude
source inoperative.
Appendix A
• GDL 88H
configuration module
needs service.
Appendix B
Index
Sec 8
Glossary
• GDL 88H external
traffic system
inoperative or
connection lost.
• GDL 88H is inoperative
or connection to
GDU is lost.
• GDL 88H CSA failure.
6-4
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Alert Message
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
ENG SENSOR
UNIT 1/2
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
DSCRT CONFIG
Sec 5
Additional
Features
DIAG MODE
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
DB SYNC
ERROR
Sec 3
MFD
DB SYNC
COMPLETE
DB SYNC
DISABLED
• GDL 88H external
traffic system in
standby for more
than 60 seconds.
• Pilot stored data was • Reset your settings.
lost. Recheck data
• G600 pilot configurable items have
and settings.
been returned to default settings.
• Database found on • Remove database or move to
top card.
bottom slot.
• Database sync
• Restart required to use new
complete.
databases.
• No database card
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
found to receive
service.
databases.
• Not enough space to • Contact your Garmin dealer for
receive one or more
service.
databases.
• System is in
Diagnostic Mode.
• Discrete outpout
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
configuration error.
service.
• Configuration error. • Contact your Garmin dealer for
Communication with
service.
sensors is halted.
Sec 2
PFD
DB ERR
• GDL 88H external
traffic system has a
low battery.
Sec 1
System
DATA LOST
Action
Foreword
DATALINK
(cont)
Description
Appendix A
• Communication with
sensors lost.
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
6-5
ETM CAPTURE
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Alert Message
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
ETM EXCEED
FAN 1/2 FAIL
• Engine Trend Monitor • Refer to ADAS+ documentation for
data capture.
appropriate action.
• ADAS+ engine trend
monitor is recording
trend data.
• Engine Trend Monitor • Refer to ADAS+ documentation for
exceedence/advisory.
appropriate action.
• ADAS+ engine trend
monitor is reporting
an exceedence or
advisory condition.
• Engine Trend Monitor • Refer to ADAS+ documentation for
needs service.
appropriate action.
• ADAS+ engine trend
monitor is reporting
a system fault.
• Cooling fan 1/2 has • Contact your Garmin dealer for
failed.
service.
Sec 7
Symbols
• Extended operation
at high temperatures
is not recommended
as damage to the
GDU may occur.
Sec 8
Glossary
• PFD/MFD coloration
may be incorrect.
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
Action
• Unit may operate
at extreme
temperatures
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
ETM FAULT
Description
GAD 43
6-6
• Backlight may dim
to reduce power and
heat.
• GAD 43
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
communication lost.
service.
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Alert Message
GAD 43
GAD 43
GAD 43
GAD 43
GAD 43
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Appendix B
Index
GAD 43
Appendix A
GAD 43
Sec 8
Glossary
GAD 43
Sec 7
Symbols
GAD 43
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
GAD 43
Sec 5
Additional
Features
GAD 43
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
GAD 43
Sec 3
MFD
GAD 43
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
• Roll Deviation Fault. • Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
• Yaw Rate Deviation • Contact your Garmin dealer for
Fault.
service.
• AHRS A429 Attitude • Contact your Garmin dealer for
Time out Fault.
service.
• AHRS A429 Attitude • Contact your Garmin dealer for
Invalid Fault.
service.
• AHRS Pitch Out of
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
Range Fault.
service.
• AHRS Attitude Invalid • Contact your Garmin dealer for
Fault.
service.
• AHRS A429 Heading • Contact your Garmin dealer for
Time-out Fault.
service.
• AHRS A429 Heading • Contact your Garmin dealer for
Invalid Fault.
service.
• Power Supply Fault. • Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
• AC Reference Lost.
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
• Application SCI
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
integrity fault.
service.
• Configuration
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
integrity fault.
service.
Sec 2
PFD
GAD 43
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
Sec 1
System
GAD 43
• Gyro Emulation Type
Mismatch Fault.
• Yaw Rate Scale
Factor Mismatch
Fault.
• GDU AHRS Monitor
Fault.
• Pitch Deviation Fault.
Action
Foreword
GAD 43
Description
6-7
Foreword
Alert Message
GAD 43
GAD 43E
CONFIG
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
GAD 43
GDC CONFIG
GDL69
GEO LIMITS
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
GATE MODE
GPS1/2 FAIL
Description
• Calibration integrity
fault.
• Unit fault.
• GAD 43e
configuration error.
Communication
halted.
• Automated testing
is on.
• GDC config error.
• Operating in extreme
north latitudes has
rendered heading
data unreliable.
• Communication lost • Use an alternate navigation
with GPS 1/2.
source.
• Timing data from
GPS 1/2 is lost.
• GSR has failed.
GWX CONFIG
• GWX config error.
Config service
required.
• GWX needs service.
6-8
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
• GDL 69 has failed.
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
• AHRS1 too far North/ • Use alternate means of navigation.
South, no magnetic • Check AFMS for limitations.
heading provided.
GPS(1/2) PPS
FAIL
GSR FAIL
GWX SERVICE
Action
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Alert Message
• AHRS1/2 in
no-magnetometer
reversionary mode.
• Check AFMS for limitations.
• Heading fault state
on AHRS.
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• External HTAWS
configuration
mismatch.
• No data from one
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
or more airspeed
service.
sensors.
• Error in calibration of • Calibration service required.
a specific LRU, where
Contact your Garmin dealer for
<LRU> denotes a
service.
specific LRU, such as
GSU or GRS.
• Error in the
• Config service required. Contact
configuration of a
your Garmin dealer for service.
specific LRU, where
<LRU> denotes a
specific LRU, such as
GDL69 or GWX.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
<LRU> CONFIG
Sec 3
MFD
<LRU> CAL
Sec 2
PFD
HTAWS
• GDU is in the
reversionary trackbased mode.
• External HTAWS not
available. Internal
TERRAIN-HSVT
alerting enabled.
• Use Compass or other course
information.
Sec 1
System
HDG LOST
• Heading data is
unreliable.
• HDG features
disabled or defaulted
to GPS1 TRK.
IAS NO COMP
Action
Foreword
HDG FAULT
Description
6-9
<LRU>
COOLING
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Alert Message
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
<LRU> DB ERR
Description
• <LRU> has poor
cooling. Reducing
power usage by
dimming display.
Action
• Specific LRU has poor cooling,
where <LRU> denotes the specific
LRU and power is being reduced.
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
• Replace or update database.
• <LRU> database
error exists, where
"<LRU> database"
denotes the specific
unit database.
<LRU> KEYSTK • <LRU> <KEY> is
stuck. The <LRU>
has detected the
<KEY> key as stuck,
where <LRU> and
<KEY> denote a
specific LRU and key.
<LRU> SERVICE • <LRU> needs
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service. Contact
service. Specific LRU should be
repair facility.
serviced, where <LRU> denotes
the specific LRU.
<LRU> VOLTAGE • <LRU> has low
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
voltage. Reducing
service.
power usage by
dimming display,
where <LRU>
denotes the specific
LRU and power is
being reduced.
MANIFEST
• <LRU> software
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
mismatch,
service.
communication
halted.
6-10
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Alert Message
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• Register with GFDS.
Sec 7
Symbols
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
Sec 8
Glossary
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
• Simulator mode is active.
Appendix B
Index
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Appendix A
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• ADAS+ engine
trend monitor is
reporting a previous
exceedence.
RADAR
• Data does not match
for 15 seconds, or
CONTROLS
more
DISAGREE
REGISTER GFDS • Data services are
inoperative. GFDS is
not registered.
ROL NO COMP • No data from one
or more roll attitude
sensors.
RS-232 CONFIG • RS-232 configuration
error.
RS-485 CONFIG • RS-485 configuration
error.
SIMULATOR
• Simulator mode is
active. Do not use for
navigation.
Sec 3
MFD
• No navigation
receiver 1/2 data.
• No data is being sent • Contact your Garmin dealer for
to the GDU
service.
• No data from one or • Contact your Garmin dealer for
more pitch attitude
service.
sensors.
• Previous Engine
• Refer to ADAS+ documentation for
Trend Monitor
appropriate action.
exceedence.
Sec 2
PFD
PREV EXCEED
• Communication with • Switch to alternate navigation
NAV1/2 is lost.
(GPS or otherwise) if available.
Sec 1
System
NO RADAR
DATA
PIT NO COMP
Action
Foreword
NAV1/2
Description
6-11
STORMSCOPE
SVT DISABLED
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Alert Message
Sec 3
MFD
SW MISMATCH
TDB
TERRAIN DSP
TRAFFIC
CONFIG
TRAFFIC FAIL
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
TAWS
6-12
Description
• Stormscope either
reports a failure or
has timed-out.
• Outside of terrain
database coverage
area.
®
Action
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
• Repeat steps to reactivate SVT
with the appropriate PFD soft keys.
• Terrain database
• Install 9 arc-second database.
resolution is too low.
• GDU software
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
version mismatch. No
service.
GDU crossfill.
• External TAWS not
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
available. Internal
service.
TERRAIN-SVT
alerting enabled.
• External TAWS
configuration
mismatch.
• Airframe does not
support Terrain
database.
• Terrain or obstacle
• Update database.
database error in
TAWS B or TERRAINSVT only.
• ADS-B traffic data
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
does not match
service.
configuration.
• Traffic device has
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
failed.
service.
• Traffic data will no
longer be displayed.
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Alert Message
Description
Action
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Table 6-1 Alert Messages
Foreword
TRAFFIC STDBY • Traffic is in Standby • Check traffic system controls on
Mode while airborne.
the MFD traffic map page or traffic
system.
TRK LOST
• Heading and track
from active GPS lost.
HSI is using secondary
GPS track.
TRK TRAFFIC
• Heading Lost. Traffic
is now based on
track.
WX ALERT
• Possible severe
• Check weather radar.
weather ahead.
WX RADAR
• Communication with • Contact your Garmin dealer for
Weather Radar lost.
service.
WX RDR
• Weather radar needs • Contact your Garmin dealer for
SERVICE
service.
service.
WXR INPUT
• Weather radar is
• Contact your Garmin dealer for
FAULT
service.
not receiving one or
more inputs.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
6-13
System Status
The System Status page of Aux mode shows the status, serial number, and
software version of LRUs and the date of databases. There are no menu pages.
In the LRU Status column, a green check means the unit is present and operating properly, while a red “X” indicates an absence or failure.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
6.2
Database Sync
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Active Databases
System LRUs
Figure 6-1 System Status Displays
6-14
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
7
SYMBOLS
Map Page Symbols
Symbol
Sec 1
System
7.1
Foreword
The following tables describe the symbols that are found on the MFD Map
displays.
Description
Sec 2
PFD
Unknown Airport
Non-towered, Non-serviced Airport
Sec 3
MFD
Towered, Non-serviced Airport
Non-towered, Serviced Airport
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Towered, Serviced Airport
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Soft Surface, Serviced Airport
Soft Surface, Non-serviced Airport
Private Airport
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Heliport
Intersection
Sec 7
Symbols
LOM (compass locator at outer marker)
NDB (Non-directional Radio Beacon)
Sec 8
Glossary
VOR
Appendix A
VOR/DME
ILS/DME or DME-only
VORTAC
TACAN
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Appendix B
Index
Table 7-1 Map Page Symbols
7-1
Foreword
7.2
SafeTaxi™ Symbols
Symbol
Description
Sec 1
System
Helipad
Airport Beacon
Sec 2
PFD
Under Construction Zones
Table 7-2 SafeTaxi Symbols
7.3
Traffic Symbols
Symbol
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Unpaved Parking Areas
Description
(Highest to Lowest Priority)
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Traffic Advisory (TA), In Range
Traffic Advisory (TA), Out of Range
Sec 7
Symbols
Proximate Advisory (PA)
Sec 8
Glossary
Other Traffic
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Table 7-3 Traffic Symbols
7-2
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Symbol
Foreword
Description
Basic Non-Directional Traffic
Basic Directional Traffic
Sec 1
System
Basic Off-scale Selected Traffic
Proximate Non-Directional Traffic
Sec 2
PFD
Proximate Directional Traffic
Sec 3
MFD
Proximate Off-scale Selected Traffic
Non-Directional Alerted Traffic
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Off-Scale Non-Directional Alerted Traffic
Directional Alerted Traffic
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Off-Scale Directional Alerted Traffic
Non-Directional Surface Vehicle
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Directional Surface Vehicle
NOTE: Color of basic and proximate traffic is dependent on airborne/on-ground
status of target (target is brown when on the ground, see the surface vehicles).
Sec 7
Symbols
Table 7-4 ADS-B Traffic Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
7-3
Terrain Obstacle Symbols
Unlighted Obstacle
(Height is less than
1000 ft AGL)
Lighted Obstacle
(Height is less
than 1000 ft AGL)
Unlighted Obstacle
(Height is greater
than 1000 ft AGL)
Lighted Obstacle
(Height is greater than
1000 ft AGL)
Sec 1
System
Foreword
7.4
Sec 2
PFD
Table 7-4 Obstacle Altitude/Color Correlation
Windmill
Grouped
Obstacles
Power Line
Sec 3
MFD
Tower
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
The “*” notes
grouped obstacles.
Table 7-5 Obstacle Icon Types
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Obstacle is at or above the aircraft altitude (Red)
250 ft
Obstacle is between 250 ft and 0 ft
below the aircraft altitude (Yellow)
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
250 ft
Sec 7
Symbols
Obstacle is 250 ft, or more,
below the aircraft altitude (White)
Figure 7-1 Obstacle Altitude Correlation
Sec 8
Glossary
Terrain is more than 250 ft above
the aircraft altitude (Red)
Terrain is between
0 ft and 250 ft above
the aircraft altitude
(Orange)
Appendix A
250 ft
250 ft
500 ft
Terrain is between 0 ft and 250 ft below the aircraft altitude (Yellow)
Appendix B
Index
Terrain is between 250 ft and 500 ft below the aircraft altitude (Green)
Terrain more than 500 ft below the aircraft altitude (Black)
Figure 7-2 TERRAIN Altitude/Color Correlation
7-4
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
7.5
Basemap Symbols
Foreword
Symbol
Description
Interstate Highway
Sec 1
System
State Highway
Sec 2
PFD
US Highway
National Highway - 2-digit drawn inside
Sec 3
MFD
Small City or Town
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Medium City
Large City
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Table 7-6 Basemap Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
7-5
Foreword
7.6
Map Tool Bar Symbols
Symbol
Description
Terrain Proximity Enabled and Available Indicator
Sec 1
System
Terrain Proximity Enabled and Not Available Indicator
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Point Obstacle Enabled and Available Indicator
(Software version 5.12 and later)
Point Obstacle Enabled and Not Available Indicator
(Software version 5.12 and later)
Wire Obstacles Enabled and Available Indicator
(Software version 5.12 and later)
Wire Obstacles Enabled and Not Available Indicator
(Software version 5.12 and later)
StormScope
Sec 5
Additional
Features
StormScope Enabled and Not Available Indicator
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Ownship is receiving TIS-B and ADS-R services
(Software version 5.11 or earlier)
Possible incomplete traffic picture – ownship is not receiving one (or
both) of the TIS-B or ADS-R services (Software version 5.11 or earlier)
Traffic Enabled and Available Indicator
Traffic Enabled and Not Available Indicator
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Table 7-7 Map Tool Bar Symbols
7-6
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
7.7
Miscellaneous Symbols
Foreword
Symbol
Description
Rotary Wing, Piston
Sec 1
System
Rotary Wing, Turbine
Sec 2
PFD
Default Map Cursor
Measuring Cursor
Sec 3
MFD
MFD Wind Vector (w/ valid GPS solution)
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
PFD Wind Vector styles
Parallel Track Waypoint
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Restricted/Prohibited/Warning/Alert
TFR (Temporary Flight Restrictions)
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
MOA
Sec 7
Symbols
Class B Airspace
Class C Airspace
Class D Airspace
Sec 8
Glossary
User Waypoint
Table 7-8 Miscellaneous Symbols
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
7-7
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
This page intentionally left blank
7-8
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
8
GLOSSARY
Foreword
active, activate
Air Data Computer
Automatic Direction Finder
Attitude Direction Indicator
Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast
Automatic Flight Following
Airplane Flight Manual
Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
Above Ground Level
Attitude and Heading Reference System
Airman’s Information Manual
Airman’s Meteorological Information
altitude
autopilot
approach
airport, aerodrome
Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
airspace
Air Route Traffic Control Center
airspeed
Automated Surface Observing System
Air Traffic Control
ATC Radar Beacon System
Automatic Terminal Information Service
auxiliary
Automated Weather Observing System
BARO
BC
Bearing
barometric setting
backcourse
The compass direction from the present position to a
destination waypoint
bearing
center runway
degrees Celsius
Course Deviation Indicator
channel
cloud
clear
configuration
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
8-1
Sec 8
Glossary
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 3
MFD
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 2
PFD
BRG
C
ºC
CDI
CHNL
CLD
CLR
CONFIG
Sec 1
System
ACT, ACTV
ADC
ADF
ADI
ADS-B
AFF
AFM
AFMS
AGL
AHRS
AIM
AIRMET
ALT
AP
APR
APT
ARINC
ARSPC
ARTCC
AS
ASOS
ATC
ATCRBS
ATIS
AUX
AWOS
Crosstrack Error
CRS
CRSR
CTA
CTRL
CUM
The line between two points to be followed by the
aircraft
The distance the aircraft is off a desired course in either
direction, left or right
course
cursor
Control Area
control
The total of all legs in a flight plan.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Course
D ALT
DB, DBASE
DCLTR, DECLTR
deg
DEP
Desired Track (DTK)
DEST
DFLT
DIS
Distance
DME
DP
DPRT
DSBL
DTK
EDR
ELEV
EMI
ENR
En Route Safe Altitude
ENT
ERR
ESA
ETA
ETE
8-2
density altitude
database
declutter
degree
departure
The desired course between the active “from” and
“to” waypoints
destination
default
distance
The ‘great circle’ distance from the present position to
a destination waypoint
Distance Measuring Equipment
Departure Procedure
departure
disabled
Desired Track
Excessive Descent Rate
elevation
Electromagnetic Interference
en route
The recommended minimum altitude within ten miles
left or right of the desired course on an active flight
plan or direct-to
enter
error
En route Safe Altitude
Estimated Time of Arrival
Estimated Time En Route
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
degrees Fahrenheit
Federal Aviation Administration
Federal Communication Commission
forecast
flight director
Flight Information Services-Broadcast
Flight Information Service Data Link
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
flight plan
frequency
freezing
Flight Service Station
foot/feet
G/S, GS
GDC
GDL
GDU
GEO
GLS
GMA
GMT
GMU
GPS
GPSS
Ground Speed
glideslope
Garmin Air Data Computer
Garmin Satellite Data Link
Garmin Display Unit
geographic
Global Navigation Satellite Landing System
Garmin Audio Panel System
Greenwich Mean Time
Garmin Magnetometer Unit
Global Positioning System
GPS Roll Steering
The velocity that the aircraft is travelling relative to a
ground position
see Track
Garmin Reference System
Ground Speed
Garmin Transponder
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
8-3
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 5
Additional
Features
heading
The direction an aircraft is pointed, based upon
indications from a magnetic compass or a properly set
directional gyro
Horizontal Figure of Merit
mercury
hectopascal
Horizontal Protection Level
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 3
MFD
HFOM
Hg
hPa
HPL
Sec 2
PFD
HDG
Heading
Sec 1
System
Ground Track
GRS
GS
GTX
Foreword
ºF
FAA
FCC
FCST
FD
FIS-B
FISDL
FLTA
FPL
FREQ
FRZ
FSS
ft
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix B
Index
HSDB
HSI
Hz
High-Speed Data Bus
Horizontal Situation Indicator
Hertz
IAF
ICAO
IFR
IGRF
ILS
IMC
IOI
INFO
in HG
INT
INTEG
ITI
Initial Approach Fix
International Civil Aviation Organization
Instrument Flight Rules
International Geomagnetic Reference Field
Instrument Landing System
Instrument Meteorological Conditions
Imminent Obstacle Impact
information
inches of mercury
intersection(s)
integrity (RAIM unavailable)
Imminent Terrain Impact
L
LAT
LCD
LCL
LED
Leg
LIFR
LNAV
LOC
LOI
LON
LPV
LRU
LT
LTNG
left, left runway
latitude
Liquid Crystal Display
local
Light Emitting Diode
The portion of a flight plan between two waypoints
Low Instrument Flight Rules
Lateral Navigation
localizer
loss of integrity (GPS)
longitude
Localizer Performance with Vertical guidance
Line Replacement Unit
left
lightning
MAG
MAG VAR
MapMX
Magnetic
Magnetic Variation
A proprietary data format used to forward navigation
information from the Garmin GPS units to the GDU
620
maximum
MAX
8-4
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
PA
PC
PDA
PFD
P. POS
PTK
Proximity Advisory
personal computer
Premature Descent Alert
Primary Flight Display
Present Position
parallel track
QTY
quantity
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Outside Air Temperature
Omni Bearing Selector
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
OAT
OBS
Sec 3
MFD
navigation
NAVigation AID
Negative Climb Rate
Non-Directional Beacon
Next Generation Radar
Sec 2
PFD
NAV
NAVAID
NCR
NDB
NEXRAD
Sec 1
System
MKR
MOA
MOV
mpm
MSA
MSG
MSL
MT
mV
MVFR
maximum speed (overspeed)
barometric minimum descent altitude
Aviation Routine Weather Report
Multi Function Display
minimum
Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe altitude within
ten miles of the aircraft present position
marker beacon
Military Operations Area
movement
meters per minute
Minimum Safe Altitude
message
Mean Sea Level
meter
millivolt(s)
Marginal Visual Flight Rules
Foreword
MAXSPD
MDA
METAR
MFD
MIN
Minimum Safe Altitude
8-5
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix B
Index
R
RAIM
RAM
REF
REQ
REV
RMI
RNG
RNWY
ROC
RT
RTC
right, right runway
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
random access memory
reference
required
reverse, revision, revise
Radio Magnetic Indicator
range
runway
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
right
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
SBAS
SCIT
SD
SFC
SIAP
SID
SIGMET
SLP/SKD
SMBL
SPD
SRVC, SVC
STAR
STATS
STBY
STD
SUA
SUSP
SVT
SW
SYS
Satellite-Based Augmentation System
Storm Cell Identification and Tracking
Secure Digital
surface
Standard Instrument Approach Procedures
Standard Instrument Departure
Significant Meteorological Information
slip/skid
symbol
speed
service
Standard Terminal Arrival Route
statistics
standby
standard
Special Use Airspace
suspend
Synthetic Vision
software
system
T
TA
TACAN
TAF
TAS
TAS
true
Traffic Advisory
Tactical Air Navigation System
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
True Airspeed
Traffic Advisory System
8-6
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 8
Glossary
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 7
Symbols
Wide Area Augmentation System
World Geodetic System - 1984
waypoint(s)
weather
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
WAAS
WGS-84
WPT
WX
Sec 5
Additional
Features
VS
VSI
velocity (airspeed)
variation
Visual Flight Rules
Very High Frequency
VOR/Localizer Receiver
Visual Meteorological Conditions
vertical navigation
VHF Omni-directional Range
very high frequency omnidirectional range station and
tactical air navigation
Vertical speed
Vertical Speed Indicator
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
V, Vspeed
VAR
VFR
VHF
VLOC
VMC
VNAV, VNV
VOR
VORTAC
Sec 3
MFD
unavailable
user
Coordinated Universal Time
Universal Transverse Mercator/ Universal Polar
Stereographic Grid
Sec 2
PFD
UNAVAIL
USR
UTC
UTM/UPS
Sec 1
System
TRK
TRSA
Total Air Temperature
Terrain Awareness and Warning System
Terminal Control Area
Traffic Collision Avoidance System
temperature
terminal
Temporary Flight Restriction
True Heading
Traffic Information System
Terminal Maneuvering Area
topographic
Direction of aircraft movement relative to a ground
position; also ‘Ground Track’
track
Terminal Radar Service Area
Foreword
TAT
TAWS
TCA
TCAS
TEMP
TERM
TFR
T HDG
TIS
TMA
Topo
Track
8-7
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
XPDR
XTK
8-8
transponder
cross-track
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
APPENDIX A
Foreword
SD Card Use and Databases
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
2) To eject the card, gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Inserting an SD Card
1) Insert the SD card in the SD card slot (the front of the card should be flush with
the face of the display bezel).
Sec 5
Additional
Features
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for instructions on updating the aviation
database.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: Ensure the GDU 620 is powered off before inserting or removing
an SD card.
Sec 3
MFD
The unit will generate an error in the event that a database SD card is inserted
into the top slot. Aviation databases can be loaded from an SD card in either slot.
If the aviation database on the SD card is more than two cycles expired, and the
pilot declines the system’s prompt to update the aviation database, the system
will provide a second prompt that allows the pilot to suppress future prompts to
update to that particular aviation database on that SD card.
Sec 2
PFD
SD cards are required for Terrain, Obstacle, FliteChart, SafeTaxi, and
ChartView database storage as well as Jeppesen aviation and ChartView database
updates. The Aviation Database update card may be inserted in either SD card
slot for database updates and then removed. Other database cards must be
located in the lower SD card slot. ChartView is an optional feature that requires
enablement by a Garmin dealer.
Sec 1
System
The G500H System uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load and store various
types of data. For basic flight operations, SD cards are required for database
storage as well as database updates.
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
A-1
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Function
Where
Stored
Update
Cycle
Airport, NAVAID,
Waypoint, and
Airspace information
Internal
GDU 620
memory
28 days (on
Thursdays)
fly.garmin.com Updates installed via
SD card and copied
into internal memory
IGRF model AHRS magnetic
variation model
Internal
GRS 77
memory
5 years
fly.garmin.com Included with
Aviation database
SafeTaxi
Airport surface
diagrams
SD card
56 days (on
Thursdays)
fly.garmin.com
Terrain
Topographic map,
SVT, Terrain/TAWS
SD card
As required
fly.garmin.com 9 arc-second version
required for SVT
Obstacle
Obstacle information
for map, SVT, and
TAWS
SD card
56 days (on
Thursdays)
fly.garmin.com
Basemap
Boundary and road
information
Internal
As required
Memory or
SD card
fly.garmin.com
Airport
Directory
Airport facility and
FBO information
SD card
56 days
fly.garmin.com Database may be
available in different
versions. Update
cycle and content
may vary.
FliteCharts
FAA-published
terminal procedures
SD card
28 days (on
Thursdays)
fly.garmin.com Disables 180 days
after expiration date.
ChartView
Jeppesen terminal
procedures
SD card
14 days (on
Fridays)
Contact
Jeppesen
Aviation
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Database
Name
Provider
Notes
Optional feature
that requires Garmin
dealer enablement.
Disables 70 days
after expiration date.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Table A-1 Database List
A-2
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Jeppesen Databases
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
3) Verify the correct update cycle is loaded during power-up. Press the ENT key to
continue or the CLR key to cancel loading.
Sec 3
MFD
2) Turn the G500H System ON.
Sec 2
PFD
Updating the Jeppesen Aviation Database
1) With the G500H System OFF, insert the SD card containing the aviation
database update into the upper card slot of the GDU 620 to be updated (label
of SD card should face up).
Sec 1
System
The optional ChartView database is updated on a 14 day cycle. The ChartView
database is provided directly from Jeppesen. ChartView is an optional feature
that requires enablement by a Garmin dealer. Contact Jeppesen (www.jeppesen.
com) for ChartView subscription and update information.
Foreword
The aviation database is updated on a 28 day cycle. Aviation database updates
are provided by Garmin and may be downloaded from the Garmin web site
“fly.garmin.com” onto a Garmin provided Supplemental data card. Contact
Garmin at fly.garmin.com for navigation database updates and update kits. The
aviation database is stored internally and the data card is only used to transfer
the database into the unit.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure A-1 Database Initialization Display
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
A-3
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4) A notice on the display will indicate successful updating of the database.
5) The following display will show the databases and their current status.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Figure A-2 Database Loading Completed
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure A-3 Database Information on the Splash Screen
6) Use the large MFD knob to select the AUX page group and then small MFD
knob to reach the System Status Page.
7) Press the DBASE soft key to place the cursor in the “DATABASE” window.
8) Turn the small MFD knob to scroll through the list and check that all databases
are current and there are no errors. If a database is highlighted in yellow, it is
either expired or the G500H can not determine the date.
9) Power down the GDU 620.
A-4
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin Databases
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
• FliteCharts – The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the
United States only. This database is updated on a 28-day cycle. If not updated
within 180 days of the expiration date, FliteCharts no longer functions.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• SafeTaxi – The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams
for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following ground control
instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in
relation to taxiways, ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database
is updated on a 56-day cycle. SafeTaxi will still be shown after it has expired.
Sec 3
MFD
• Obstacle – The obstacles database contains data for obstacles, such as
towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft. Obstacles 200 feet and
higher are included in the obstacle database. The rotorcraft database
includes all reported obstacles regardless of height. It is very important to
note that not all obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not
be contained in the obstacle database. This database is updated on a 56day cycle. Obstacles will still be shown after the database has expired.
Several obstacle database options are available. Obstacle databases created
for GTN software version 5.10 or later include all power lines or only HOT
lines depending on the type of obstacle database installed. Hazardous
Obstacle Transmission (HOT) Lines are those power lines that are co-located
with other FAA-identified obstacles. The installed obstacle database type
can be verified on the System Status page. Power line data is available for
the contiguous United States as well as small parts of Canada and Mexico.
Sec 2
PFD
• Terrain – The terrain database contains terrain mapping data. It is updated
periodically and has no expiration date.
Sec 1
System
The following GDU 620 databases are stored on Supplemental Data Cards
provided by Garmin:
Foreword
WARNING: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases
comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately processes and crossvalidates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness
of the data.
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
A-5
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Since these databases are not stored internally in the GDU 620, a Supplemental
Data Card containing identical database versions must be kept in each display
unit for dual installations. After subscribing to the desired database product,
the database product will need to be downloaded to a Supplemental Data Card.
Insert the Supplemental Data Card into the lower card slot shown in Figure
A-4. The Supplemental Data Card should not be removed except to update the
databases stored on the card. The upper slot is typically used for updating the
navigation database and is then normally left open. The Navigation card may be
inserted in either slot, but should use the same slot each time.
Navigation Database SD Update Card
Navigation, Terrain, Obstacles, Airports,
SafeTaxi, Charts (FliteChart or ChartView)
Database SD Card
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• Airport Directory (optional) – The airport directory database contains
airport facility and FBO information. This database is optional and “N/A”
will be displayed in white text on the startup screen if the database is not
installed. This database may be available in multiple versions with varying
update cycles and/or content.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure A-4 SD Card Database Location
The Garmin databases can be updated by following the instructions detailed
in the “Navigation Databases” section of the Garmin web site (fly.garmin.com).
Once the updated files have been downloaded from the web site, a PC equipped
with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the new
databases onto the existing Supplemental Data Cards. The following equipment
is required to perform the update:
• Windows-compatible PC computer (Windows 2000, XP, Vista, or Windows
7 recommended)
• SanDisk SD Card Reader, P/Ns SDDR-93 or SDDR-99 or equivalent card
reader
• Updated database obtained from the Garmin web site
• Existing Supplemental Database SD Card (P/N 010-00769-xx)
It may be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized
service facility in order to use certain database features.
A-6
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Updating Garmin databases
1) Download the data to the data cards from the appropriate web site.
2) Insert the Database SD card in an empty card slot of the GDU 620. The SD card
containing the ChartView, FliteCharts, SafeTaxi, or any other database (except
for the Jeppesen Aviation Database) must be inserted into the lower slot on the
GDU 620.
3) Apply power to the G500H System. View the MFD power-up splash screen.
Check that the databases are initialized and displayed on the splash screen.
When updating the terrain and FliteCharts databases, an “in progress” message
may be seen. If this message is present, wait for the system to finish loading
before proceeding. Some databases can take up to 15 minutes to update.
4) Acknowledge the Power-up Page agreement by pressing the ENT key or the
right-most soft key. If a database is highlighted in yellow, it is either expired or
the G500H can not determine the date.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure A-5 Database Information on the Splash Screen
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
A-7
Appendix B
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Appendix A
5) Use the large MFD knob to select the AUX page group and then the small
MFD knob to reach the System Status Page.
6) Press the DBASE soft key to place the cursor in the “DATABASE” window.
7) Turn the small MFD knob to scroll through the list and check that all databases
are current and there are no errors.
8) Power down the GDU 620.
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
This page intentionally left blank
A-8
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
INDEX
1-2 key 2-3
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
B
Appendix B
Index
B-1
Appendix A
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 8
Glossary
Backcourse 2-23, 2-24
Backlighting 1-23
Barometric minimum 2-14
Barometric pressure 1-17, 1-20, 1-22,
2-13, 3-38
Basemap symbols 7-5
Beacon 7-1, 7-2
Bearing information 2-26–2-27
Bearing line 2-27
Bearing Pointers 2-22, 2-26
Best glide 2-7
Bezel keys 1-15, 1-17
BRG 1-2 2-4
Brightness 1-20, 1-21, 1-23, 3-29, 3-30
Sec 7
Symbols
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 2
PFD
Activating XM 5-22
Active flight plan 2-14, 3-1, 3-65, 3-66,
3-67
Additional features 5-1
ADF 1-1, 1-2, 2-2, 2-4, 2-27, 8-1
ADIZ 3-5, 3-10, 3-26
ADS-B 4-37
AFF 3-56
Age 4-45
AHRS iii, 1-1, 1-4, 1-11, 3-35, 6-2, 6-7,
6-9
Aircraft symbol 2-8, 2-18, 3-3
Air Data Computer 1-1, 1-3, 1-4
AIREP 4-98, 4-116
AIRMETs 4-46, 4-60, 4-96, 4-113, 4-122
Airport beacon 7-2
Airport diagram 5-3, 5-4, A-5
Airport Directory 3-74, A-6
Airport signs 2-5, 5-36
Airspace labels 3-27
Airspeed Indicator 1-22, 2-6–2-7
Airspeed reference 1-20, 1-21, 2-7, 3-31
Airspeed tape 2-6, 3-31
Airspeed trend vector 2-6
Air temperature 1-3, 1-7, 2-1
Airways 3-2, 3-5, 3-10, 3-26
Alerts 2-13, 2-14, 3-67, 4-17, 4-30, 4-33,
6-1
Altimeter ii, 2-12, 2-13
Altitude 1-1, 1-3, 1-15, 1-22, 2-10, 2-13,
2-14, 3-15, 3-29, 3-35, 3-37,
3-67, 4-3
Altitude alerter 2-13, 5-15
Altitude alerting 2-13
Altitude Bug 1-15, 2-1, 2-12
Altitude Display Mode 4-22, 4-23
Altitude minimums 2-14, 3-67, 5-15
Sec 1
System
A
Foreword
Symbols
Altitude select 1-15
Altitude trend vector 2-12
Annunciations 1-11, 2-13, 2-14, 4-17,
4-25, 4-26, 4-35, 4-37, 5-6, 6-1
Answering a phone call 3-64
Antenna 4-107
Approaches 2-23, 2-24, 5-3, 5-4, 5-9,
5-13, 5-37, 8-1
Apt Dir 3-74
AP Test 2-3
APTSIGNS 2-5
Arc 4-6, 4-12
Arrivals 5-3, 5-4
Attitude 1-1, 1-4, 1-11, 2-8, 2-10, 6-7,
8-1
Attitude and Heading Reference System
(AHRS) 1-4, 1-11, 6-2
Attitude Indicator 2-8–2-9
Attitude Sync 2-31
ATT Sync 2-31
Aural message 4-18
Automatic flight following 3-56
Autopilot 1-1, 2-3
Auto-slewing 2-24
Auto zoom 3-10, 3-12
Aux mode 3-29
AUX - System Status Page 5-21
Aviation map data 3-24
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
C
Call suppression 3-58
Canadian Nexrad 4-54
Cautions iv, 3-5, 3-38, 4-18
CDI 1-15, 1-21, 2-2, 2-3, 2-18, 2-19,
2-20, 2-21, 2-22, 2-24, 3-29,
3-34, 3-35, 3-65
CDI source 2-21, 2-24, 2-27
Cell movement 3-20, 3-21, 4-46, 4-72,
4-73
Channel 1-9, 3-40, 5-25, 5-26, 5-27,
5-29
Chart category 3-69, 5-8
Charts 3-76, 5-1, 5-2, 5-4, 5-17
ChartView 5-1, 5-2, 5-3, A-1, A-3, A-7
ChartView database 5-3, 5-4, A-1, A-3
ChartView subscription A-3
City 3-5, 3-68, 3-72, 4-46
City forecast 4-46, 4-67, 4-68
Class B airspace 3-5, 3-25, 7-7
Class C airspace 3-5, 3-25, 7-7
Class D airspace 3-5, 3-25, 7-7
Cloud tops 4-46, 4-57, 4-58
Cloudy 4-47
Cold front 4-67
Color scheme 5-17
Combined NEXRAD 4-113
Compass card 2-18, 2-20
Continental US NEXRAD 4-111
CONUS 4-111
County warnings 4-46, 4-69
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) 2-18,
2-19, 2-20–2-21
Course pointer 2-18, 2-19, 2-20, 2-24
Course select 1-15, 2-1, 2-22
Crossfill 1-21, 3-34
Cross track error 2-21
Current heading 1-15, 2-18, 2-19, 2-20,
2-23
Current track indicator 2-18, 2-20
Cursor 1-17, 3-6, 3-7, 3-8, 3-9, 3-20,
3-30, 3-32, 3-33, 3-34, 3-72,
3-74, 7-7
Customizing maps 3-9
B-2
Customizing Nav Map pages 3-9
Cycle number 5-4, 5-21
Cyclone 4-44, 4-46, 4-76
D
Database 1-4, 1-13, 3-10, 3-41, 4-3, 4-4,
4-9, 4-63, 4-67, 4-100, 4-118,
5-3, 5-4, 5-21, 6-10, 6-14, A-1,
A-5
Databases A-1
Database SYNC 3-42
Data fields 3-66, 3-67
Data link 1-2, 1-9, 4-28, 4-42, 4-45, 4-49,
4-52, 4-56, 4-58, 4-59, 4-61,
4-63, 4-65, 4-66, 4-68, 4-69,
4-73, 4-77, 4-80, 4-86, 4-97,
4-102, 4-104, 4-109, 4-122
Data Link Receiver troubleshooting 5-30
Date 1-20, 1-21, 3-29, 3-36, 5-4, 5-21,
6-14, A-5
Day view 5-17
DCLTR soft key 3-4, 5-18, 5-19
Decision Height (DH) 3-65
Declutter 2-10, 3-4, 3-5, 4-21, 5-19
Departures 5-3, 5-4
Display brightness 1-20, 1-21, 1-23, 3-29,
3-30
Display units 1-20, 1-22, 2-34, 3-29,
3-37, 3-38
Distance 1-20, 1-22, 3-6, 3-8, 3-9, 3-12,
3-37, 3-65, 3-68
Distance measuring 3-8
DME 7-1
DP 5-3, 5-4
Dual installation 2-15, 3-34, 3-67, 5-15,
A-6
E
Echo tops 4-46, 4-51, 4-55, 4-56, 4-57
ETA 3-65
Expiration time 4-42, 4-45, 4-122
Extreme attitude 2-10
Extreme Pitch 2-10, 5-42
Extreme Roll 2-11
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
F
Sec 8
Glossary
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
B-3
Appendix B
Index
Land data 3-2, 3-10, 3-12, 3-13
Lateral deviation scale 2-18, 2-20
Lat/Lon 3-5, 3-10, 3-17, 3-68
LDA 2-24
Legend 3-10, 3-21, 4-5, 4-43, 4-44, 4-47,
4-50, 4-53, 4-57, 4-65, 4-93,
Appendix A
L
Sec 7
Symbols
Jeppesen 5-3, A-1, A-3
Jeppesen database A-3, A-7
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
190-01150-02 Rev. J
J
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Hail 4-51
Hazard avoidance 4-1
Haze 4-47
Icing 4-60, 4-78, 4-96, 4-97, 4-113,
4-115
Identifier 3-68, 3-69, 3-70, 3-72, 5-8, 5-9,
5-36
IFR 4-60, 4-97, 4-115
IGRF model 1-4, 1-13
ILS 2-21, 2-23, 2-24, 2-25, 7-1
Imminent obstacle impact 4-11
Imminent terrain impact 4-11
INFO soft key 3-66
Infra-Red 4-94
Inhibit alerting 4-14
Intersection 3-5, 3-24, 3-25, 5-19, 7-1
Iridium 1-8, 3-54, 3-57, 4-1, 4-80
Iridium phone 3-57
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
H
Sec 3
MFD
GAD 43 1-1, 1-2, 2-3, 6-6
GDC 74H ii, 1-1, 1-3, 1-4, 1-7
GDL 69/69A 1-2, 1-9, 3-20, 3-39, 3-40,
4-1, 5-1, 5-22, 5-24, 5-25, 5-30
GDL 69 troubleshooting 5-30
GDL 88H models 1-8
GDU 620 1-1, 1-3
GDU 1040 1-1
GEA 71 1-2
GFDS 4-80
Glideslope 2-21, 2-23
Glossary 8-1
GMU 44 1-1, 1-2, 1-7
GPS altitude ii, 4-3
GPS level of service 2-18, 2-20, 2-27
Ground pointer 2-1
Ground speed 2-6, 2-10, 5-35
GRS 77H 1-1, 1-3, 1-4, 1-13
GSR 56 1-8, 3-54, 3-57
GTP 59 1-2
GTX 33 1-10, 4-1
GTX 330/330D 1-10
Sec 2
PFD
I
Sec 1
System
G
Foreword
Facility 3-68, 3-71, 3-72
Field of view 3-10, 3-18, 5-40, 5-41
Flight path marker 5-31, 5-35
Flight plan 1-22, 2-14, 2-23, 3-1, 3-2,
3-12, 3-65, 5-8
FliteCharts 5-3, 5-4, A-5, A-7
FliteCharts database 5-4, A-7
Flood 4-47, 4-69
Fog 4-47
Forecast time 4-68
Forward looking terrain avoidance 4-11
Freezing level 4-46, 4-77
Frequency 2-19, 2-23, 2-24, 2-25, 2-26,
3-71, 3-73
Heading 1-4, 1-15, 2-18, 2-19, 3-1, 3-35,
4-22, 4-28
Heading bug 1-15, 2-1, 2-18, 2-19
Heading select 1-15
Helipad 7-2
Heliport 7-1
Home page 3-3
Horizon heading 2-5, 5-31, 5-33, 5-36
Horizon line 2-8
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) 1-3,
1-15, 2-1, 2-18–2-34, 5-36
Hot spots 5-18, 5-19
Hrzn Hdg 2-5
H-TAWS 4-10
Hurricanes 4-107
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix B
Index
4-103, 4-110, 4-120
Level 1-20, 1-21, 3-4, 3-5, 3-29, 3-30,
4-77
Lighting 1-23, 3-73
Lightning 3-2, 3-5, 3-20, 3-21, 4-44,
4-46, 4-59, 4-63, 4-86, 4-95,
4-100, 4-118
Limitations 4-9, 4-31, 4-51, 4-107
Localizer 2-19, 2-21, 2-24, 2-26
Loc BC 2-24
LPV 2-23, 2-27
LRU 1-1, 1-2, 1-8, 3-41, 5-30, 6-14
Lubber line 2-18, 2-20
M
Magnetometer 1-2, 1-5, 1-7
Making a phone call 3-63
Map 3-2
Map orientation 3-1, 3-3, 3-11, 3-68, 4-5,
4-44, 4-52, 4-86, 4-109
Map panning 3-6
Map pointer 3-2, 3-6
Map range 1-22, 3-2, 3-4, 3-11, 5-18
Map setup 3-9, 4-13, 5-41
Map symbols 7-1, 7-5
Map toolbar symbols 7-6
Marker beacon 2-29
Markings 2-7, 5-18, 5-19
Mean Sea Level 4-3
Measuring distance 3-8
Menu Key 1-17, 1-19, 3-4, 3-9
Menus 1-17, 1-19
Message 2-18, 4-18
METARs 3-65, 3-75, 4-44, 4-46, 4-63,
4-86, 4-100, 4-102, 4-118, 4-122
MFD 1-1, 1-3, 1-14, 1-17, 3-1
MFD display units 1-20, 3-29, 3-37
Military 3-10, 3-26, 4-52
Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) 2-14
Minimums 5-15
Miscellaneous symbols 7-7
Miscompare 2-30
MOA 3-5, 3-10, 3-26, 7-7
Motion vector 4-40
B-4
Mountains 4-107
Moving map 1-1, 1-3, 1-17, 3-1, 3-2,
3-10
MSL 4-3
Mute 5-28
N
National Weather Service 4-49, 4-60,
4-69, 4-96, 4-113
Nav angle 1-20, 1-22, 2-19, 3-38
Navigation database 1-4, 1-13, A-3, A-6
Navigation map 1-12, 1-17, 3-1, 3-2, 3-9,
4-3, 4-13, 4-15, 4-42, 5-18, 5-19,
5-40
Navigation source iii, 2-3, 2-18, 2-21–223, 2-26, 2-27, 3-35, 3-65
Nav range ring 3-2, 3-10, 3-13
Nav Status Bar 2-1
Nav status style 3-29, 3-33
NDB 3-5, 3-10, 3-24, 3-25, 5-19, 7-1
NEXRAD 3-20, 4-46, 4-49, 4-108, 4-109,
4-122
Legend 4-53, 4-110
Limitations 4-51
Viewing range 4-52, 4-109
NEXRAD Legend 3-21
Nexrad source 4-54
NEXRAD Viewing Range 3-21
Night view 5-17
Normal display operation 1-1
North up 3-1, 3-10, 3-11, 4-42, 4-44,
4-86
NOTAM 5-3, 5-16
Notes v
NRST 5-8
O
OAT 1-3, 1-7
OBS 1-15, 2-18, 2-22, 2-27, 3-35, 8-5
Obstacle data 3-15, 4-3, A-5
Obstacles 3-12, 3-13, 3-15, 4-4, 4-9,
4-33, 5-39, 7-4, A-5
Obstructions 4-9
Occluded front 4-68
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
P
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
S
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Appendix B
Index
B-5
Sec 7
Symbols
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
SafeTaxi 3-12, 3-24, 5-1, 5-18, 5-19,
5-21, A-1, A-5, A-7
SafeTaxi symbols 7-2
Satellite telephone 3-57
Scale 2-6, 2-7, 2-8, 2-9, 2-12, 2-18, 2-19,
2-20, 3-2, 3-4, 3-6, 3-10, 3-14,
4-3, 4-24, 5-34
Scroll bars 5-12
SDF 2-24
Secure Digital (SD) card 2-1, 3-1, A-1
Selected Altitude 2-10, 2-12, 2-13, 2-14,
3-35, 4-103, 4-120
Selected altitude range arc 3-19
Selected Course 2-22, 3-35
Selected Heading 2-19, 3-35
Serial numbers 3-41, 5-30, 6-14
Service Class 5-23, 5-24
SIGMET 4-46, 4-60, 4-61, 4-96, 4-97,
4-113, 4-114, 4-122
Sky pointer 2-9
Sky representation 2-8, 5-42, 5-43
Slewing 2-24
Slip/Skid Indicator 2-8
Smart airspace 3-26
Sec 5
Additional
Features
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 3
MFD
Radar 4-31, 4-33, 4-49, 4-51, 4-55,
4-107, 4-108
Radar altimeter 2-12, 2-16, 2-33, 3-30
Rainy 4-47
Range keys 1-17, 3-4, 3-68, 5-11
Range ring 3-2, 3-10, 3-13, 4-22, 4-23,
4-38
Sec 2
PFD
R
Sec 1
System
Page group 1-17, 3-2
Page menus 1-17, 1-19, 3-9, 3-10, 3-20,
3-23, 3-24, 3-30, 3-66, 4-6, 4-12,
4-43, 4-44
Panning 3-6, 5-12, 5-19
Parallel track 7-7
Parking area 7-2
Part Sun 4-47
PFD 1-3, 1-14
PFD display units 2-34
PFD options 1-20, 1-21, 3-29, 3-32, 3-33
PFD soft keys 2-2
Phone book 3-59
Phone call 3-63
Phone volume 3-62
Photocell 1-23
Pilot Controlled Lighting 3-73
PIREP 4-62, 4-98, 4-116
Pitch indication 2-8, 2-10
Pitch scale 2-8, 5-34
Position reporting 3-54
Power 4-108
Power-up 1-4, 1-12, 1-13, 4-35, 5-4,
5-21, A-3, A-7
Precipitation 4-51, 4-55, 4-63, 4-92,
4-100, 4-118
Preset 5-29
Product age 4-42, 4-45
Proximate advisory 7-2
Proximity advisory 4-22
RECENT 5-8
Record of Revisions vi
Reduce protection 4-15
Reference speed 2-7
Reflectivity 4-50, 4-51, 4-108
Regional NEXRAD 4-112
Register with GFDS 4-82
Restore defaults 3-30, 3-67
Restricted airspace 3-25
Roll pointer 2-8
Roll Scale 2-8, 2-9
Roll scale pointer 2-1, 2-9
Roll Scale Zero 2-8
Route 3-7, 3-65, 5-19
RP mode 4-15
Runway depiction 5-37
Runway extension 3-24
Runway information 3-71, 3-73
Foreword
Other airspace 3-26
Outside air temperature 1-3, 1-7, 2-1
Overview 1-1
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix B
Index
Snow 4-47, 4-51
Soft keys 1-14, 1-18, 2-1, 2-2, 2-10, 3-1,
4-21, 4-35, 5-26, 5-33, 5-35
Software version 3-41, 5-30, 6-14
Speed 1-3, 1-20, 1-22, 2-6, 2-7, 2-10,
2-17, 3-12, 3-29, 3-31, 3-37, 4-30
Speed range 2-7
STAR 5-3, 5-4
Stationary front 4-68
Stormscope 1-8, 4-123
Sunny 4-47
Surface analysis 4-46, 4-67
Surface data 4-44, 4-68
Surface winds 4-60, 4-97, 4-115
Symbols 4-24, 4-30, 4-45, 4-47, 5-38, 7-1
Synchronization 1-21, 3-29, 3-34, 3-35
Syn Terr 2-4
Synthetic Vision v, 2-4, 2-5, 3-10, 3-18,
4-1, 4-11, 4-17, 5-1, 5-31
Synthetic Vision alerts 4-17
Syn Vis 2-4
System description 1-1
System display units 1-20, 3-29, 3-38
System power 1-4, 1-11, 1-13
System settings 1-20, 3-29
System status 3-41, 4-9, 4-25, 4-35, 6-14
T
TACAN 7-1
TAF 3-75, 4-63, 4-100, 4-118
TAS 4-21, 5-1
TAWS alerts 4-10
TAWS-SVT 4-1, 4-11
TCA 3-10, 3-25
Temperature 1-20, 1-22, 3-38, 4-47
Temperature probe 1-1, 1-2, 1-7
Temperature reference 3-29
Terrain 1-22, 2-10, 3-1, 3-12, 3-13, 4-1,
4-3, 4-11, 4-33, 7-4, A-1
Terrain alerts 4-3, 4-11, 4-17, 4-18, 5-31
Terrain data 3-10, 3-14, 4-8, 4-9, A-5
Terrain obstacle symbols 7-4
Terrain proximity ii, 1-22, 4-1, 4-3, 7-6
Terrain-SVT iii, 4-1, 4-11
B-6
Textual METARs 4-64, 4-101, 4-119
TFR 3-3, 3-10, 3-24, 3-26, 4-70, 4-105,
4-121, 7-7
Thunderstorm 4-107
Thunderstorms 4-47, 4-69
Time 1-20, 1-21, 3-12, 3-29, 3-36, 4-42,
4-46, 4-67, 4-68, 4-122
Time zone 3-36
TIS 4-21, 4-28, 4-30, 4-31, 4-33, 5-1
TMA 3-10, 3-25
To/From Indicator 2-18, 2-19
Topo data 3-10, 3-13
Topo scale 3-3, 3-10, 3-14
Tornadoes 4-47, 4-69
Tornados 4-107
Track indicator 2-18, 2-20
Track vector 3-2, 3-10, 3-12, 4-32
Traffic Advisory 3-23, 4-1, 4-21, 4-24,
4-28, 7-2
Traffic Pop-Up 4-27, 4-34
Traffic symbols 4-30, 4-39, 5-38, 7-2
Transponder 1-10, 4-1, 4-21, 4-28, 4-31,
4-33, 4-35
Trend Vector 2-6, 2-12, 2-18, 2-20
Trim ball indicator 2-8
True Airspeed 1-22, 2-6, 2-10
True North 2-19, 3-38
Turbulence 4-60, 4-79, 4-96, 4-113
Turn Rate 2-18
Turn Rate Indicator 2-18, 2-20
U
Under construction 7-2
Unusual attitude 2-10, 5-42
V
VDI 2-23, 5-35
Vector Duration 4-41
Vector motion 4-40
Version 1-12, 3-41, 4-11, 5-21, A-6
Vertical deviation 2-23
Vertical speed 1-1, 1-3, 1-16, 1-20, 1-22,
2-1, 2-10, 2-12, 2-17, 3-29, 3-35,
3-37
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
XM radio channel presets 5-29
XM radio channels 5-27
XM radio volume 5-28
XM Satellite Radio 1-9, 5-22
XM troubleshooting 5-30
XM weather 3-66, 4-42
XM weather/radio 1-9
XTK 2-21
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Z
Zero pitch line 5-35
Sec 2
PFD
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) 1-22, 2-17
Video 3-49
VNAV 2-23, 2-27
VNV 8-7
Voice alert 4-33
Volume 1-9, 3-40, 5-25, 5-28
VOR 1-15, 2-3, 2-19, 2-21, 2-26, 3-1,
3-5, 3-10, 3-24, 3-25, 3-35, 5-19,
7-1
VORTAC 7-1
Vspeeds 2-7
W
Sec 3
MFD
WAAS 1-7, 2-23
Warm front 4-67, 4-68
Warnings ii
Waypoint information 3-68, 3-71, 3-75,
5-19
Waypoint selection 3-69
Waypoint weather 3-75
Weather 3-20, 3-75, 4-42, 4-80, 4-107
Weather legend 4-43, 4-47, 4-50
Weather product 3-21, 4-42, 4-45, 4-47,
4-52, 4-92, 4-109, 5-23
Weather radar 1-2
Weather symbols 4-45
Wind 1-20, 1-21, 2-28, 3-2, 3-10, 3-12,
3-29, 3-32, 4-46, 4-47, 4-60,
4-63, 4-65, 4-97, 4-100, 4-103,
4-115, 4-118, 4-120, 4-122, 7-7
Winds aloft 4-46, 4-65, 4-103, 4-120,
4-122
Winds aloft altitude 4-104, 4-120
Wind speed 3-12
Wind vector 1-20, 1-21, 2-28, 3-3, 3-10,
3-12, 3-29, 3-32, 7-7
WX-500 1-8, 4-123
WX soft key 3-66
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
X
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Appendix B
Index
XM 3-39, 3-40, 4-42, 5-22
XM channel categories 5-26
XM entertainment radio 5-22
XM radio activation 5-22
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
B-7
Appendix B
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
This page intentionally left blank
B-8
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. J
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
© 2015 Garmin Corporation
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel. 913/397.8200 or 800/800.1020
Fax 913/397.8282
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Rd., S.E., Salem, Oregon 97302, U.S.A.
Tel. 503/581.8101 or 800/525.6726
Fax. 503/364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road, Hounsdown Business Park,
Southampton, SO40 9RB, U.K.
Tel. +44 (0) 870 850 1243
Fax +44 (0) 238 052 4004
Garmin Singapore Pte. Ltd.
46 East Coast Road
#05-06 Eastgate
Singapore 428766
Tel. (65) 63480378
Fax (65) 63480278
www.garmin.com
Part Number 190-01150-02 Rev. J
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising